Skip to main content

Full text of "Applied physics for secondary schools"

See other formats


i 


GIFT  OF 
Agriculture  education 


APPLIED    PHYSICS 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 

FOR 

SECONDARY  SCHOOLS 


BY 

V.   D.   HAWKINS 

HEAD   OF  THE   DEPT.   OF   SCIENCE 

TECHNICAL   HIGH    SCHOOL 

CLEVELAND,    OHIO 


LONGMANS,   GREEN,   AND    CO. 

FOURTH  AVENUE  &  30TH   STREET,   NEW   YORK 
LONDON,   BOMBAY,   AND   CALCUTTA 

1912 


ft 


Copyright,  1912,  by 
LONGMANS,  GREEN,  AND  Co. 


THE- PLIMPTON-PRESS 

[W.D.O] 
NOR  WOOD-  MA  SS  •  U  •  S  •  A 


PEEFACE 

PHYSICS  ought  to  be  a  live  subject,  a  reasonable  explana- 
tion of  the  every-day  events  of  life.  It  seems  to  the  author 
of  this  text-book  that  in  recent  years  the  attempt  to  include 
in  physics  a  large  amount  of  mathematics  and  all  applica- 
tions of  the  principles  of  the  science  have  resulted  in  high 
school  texts  which  are  far  too  difficult  for  one  year  for  the 
average  high  school  pupil.  Applied  Physics  is  a  result  of  an 
attempt  to  select  the  fundamental  principles  with  barely 
enough  common  applications  to  make  them  clear  to  the 
pupil  and  to  bring  them  home  to  every-day  life,  leaving 
plenty  of  time  for  the  teacher  to  supplement  with  other 
applications  from  the  pupils'  lives  which  are  of  local  interest 
and  which  must  differ  in  every  locality. 

The  author,  then,  believes  that  the  best  methods  of  teach- 
ing the  subject  are  as  follows: 

1.  By  a  brief  text  for  all  of  which  the  pupil  will.be  held 
responsible,  and, 

2.  By  the  addition  of  many  interesting  local  applications 
to  be  supplied  by  both  teachers  and  pupils. 

With  few  exceptions  illustrative  experiments  are  not 
described  in  the  text.  They  should  be  performed.  A  large 
amount  of  demonstration  work  is  a  great  aid  to  the  under- 
standing of  the  subject.  If  the  illustrative  experiments  are 
performed  for  the  class,  as  they  should  be,  it  is  useless  to 
cumber  the  book  with  a  detailed  description  of  them.  If 
they  are  not  performed,  a  description  helps  the  student  very 
little  and  causes  him  to  spend  too  much  time  in  mastering  the 
details  of  experiments  which  he  does  not  see  and  which, 


vi  PREFACE 

therefore,  are  difficult  for  him  to  understand.  The  author 
offers  this  short  text  with  no  apologies  but  with  the  con- 
viction that  its  results  will  justify  it. 

The  chapter  on  magnetism  and  electricity  is  a  departure 
from  tradition.  The  historical  method  has  been  discarded. 
Every  boy  has  played  with  a  toy  magnet,  and  a  start  is 
made  from  this  point  of  interest.  While  he  has  the  mag- 
netic field  well  in  mind  the  dynamo,  which  is  nothing  but  a 
loop  of  wire  revolving  in  a  magnetic  field,  is  introduced. 
The  author  finds  that  it  is  no  more  difficult  for  the  pupil  to 
understand  the  three-phase  alternator  than  to  master  the 
influence  machine.  When  he  has  mastered  it,  he  knows 
how  ninety  per  cent  of  the  electricity  used  to-day  is  pro- 
duced, while  the  influence  machine  has  a  very  limited  appli- 
cation. In  this  day  of  widespread  use  of  electrical  appliances 
every  high  school  student  should  become  familiar  with  those 
he  meets  most  commonly. 

The  author  wishes  to  acknowledge  the  valuable  assistance 
given  by  Miss  Elizabeth  Jackson  of  the  English  Depart- 
ment and  Mr.  Claude  Brechner  of  the  Science  Department 
of  Technical  High  School,  Cleveland,  Ohio.  He  is  also 
indebted  to  the  C.  H.  Stoelting  Co.  of  Chicago  for  permission 
to  reproduce  the  optical  disks  on  pages  95,  96,  and  97. 


CONTENTS 

CHAPTER   I 

PAGES 

MACHINES 3-20 

WORK  —  FOOT  POUND  —  SIMPLE  MACHINES  —  PRINCIPLE  OF 
MACHINES  —  EFFICIENCY  —  LEVER  —  WHEEL  AND  AXLE 
-  PULLEY  —  INCLINED  PLANE  —  SCREW  —  WEDGE  - 
PRONY  BRAKE  —  PULLEY  CONE  —  WINDLASS. 

CHAPTER   II 

DYNAMICS 21-39 

FORCE  —  MOTION  —  VELOCITY  —  NEWTON'S  LAWS  OF  MO- 
TION —  INERTIA  —  PARALLELOGRAM  OF  FORCES  —  AERO- 
PLANE —  ACCELERATED  MOTION  --  FORMULAS  —  MO- 
MENTUM —  UNITS  OF  FORCE  —  GRAVITY  —  CENTER  OF 
GRAVITY  -  -  EQUILIBRIUM  —  CURVILINEAR  MOTION  — 
KINETIC  ENERGY  —  COEFFICIENT  OF  FRICTION  —  PEN- 
DULUM. 

CHAPTER  III 

MECHANICS  OF  FLUIDS 40-61 

SOLID  —  LIQUID  —  GAS  —  FLUID  PRESSURE  —  HYDRAULIC 
PRESS  —  PRESSURE  —  BAROMETER  —  PUMPS  —  SIPHON  — 
GAS  PRESSURE  —  DIFFUSION  —  OSMOSIS  —  BOYLE'S  LAW 
—  PRESSURE  GAUGE  —  AIR  PUMP  —  SURFACE  TENSION  — 
CAPILLARITY  —  BUOYANCY  —  ARCHIMEDES'  PRINCIPLE  — 
SPECIFIC  GRAVITY  —  DENSITY" —  HYDROMETER. 

vii 


viii  CONTENTS 

CHAPTER   IV 

STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS •'.    .    .    .    62-68 

ELASTICITY  —  STRESS  —  STRAIN  -  -  TENSILE,  SHEARING, 
TRANSVERSE,  TORSIONAL  AND  COMPRESSION  STRENGTH. 

CHAPTER  V 

SOUND 69-77 

VIBRATION  —  WAVE  MOTION  —  FREQUENCY  —  VELOCITY  — 
ECHO  —  WAVE  LENGTH  —  RESONANCE  —  BEATS  —  IN- 
TERFERENCE —  LOUDNESS  —  PITCH  —  QUALITY  —  LAWS 
OF  VIBRATING  STRINGS  PHONOGRAPH. 

CHAPTER  VI 

LIGHT 78-97 

ETHER  VIBRATIONS  —  VELOCITY  —  SHADOWS  —  REFLEC- 
TION —  INTENSITY  —  UNIT  OF  LIGHTING  POWER  —  PHO- 
TOMETRY —  REFRACTION  —  CRITICAL  ANGLE  —  INDEX 
OF  REFRACTION  —  COLOR  —  CONVEX  LENS  —  EYE  — 
OPTICAL  DISK  —  OPTICAL  INSTRUMENTS. 

CHAPTER  VII 

HEAT 98-107 

KINETIC  THEORY  —  TEMPERATURE  —  CALORIMETRY  — 
LATENT  HEAT  —  SPECIFIC  HEAT  —  COEFFICIENT  OF  EX- 
PANSION —  CHARLES'  LAW. 

CHAPTER  VIII 

HEAT  ENGINES  AND  TRANSMISSION  OF  HEAT    .    .    108-125 

BOILING  POINT  —  SATURATED  AND  SUPERHEATED  STEAM  — 
STEAM-ENGINE  —  BRAKE  HORSE-POWER  —  INDICATOR 
—  INDICATED  HORSE-POWER  —  TURBINE  —  GAS  ENGINE 
HOT  AIR  ENGINE  —  MECHANICAL  EQUIVALENT  —  CON- 
DUCTION —  CONVECTION  —  RADIATION. 


CONTENTS  ix 

CHAPTER  IX 

PAGES 

MAGNETISM  AND  ELECTRICITY 126-196 

MAGNETIC  POLES  —  ATTRACTION  AND  REPULSION  —  MAG- 
NETIC FIELD  —  THEORIES  OF  MAGNETISM  —  ELECTRICITY 

-  SIMPLE  DYNAMO  —  COMMUTATOR  —  ARMATURE  — 
ELECTROMAGNETIC    RELATION    -  -    ELECTRO    MAGNET    - 
TELEGRAPH  —  ELECTRIC  BELL  —  GALVANOMETER  —  VOLT- 
METER —  AMMETER  —  WATT -METER  —  MOTOR  —  CHARAC- 
TERISTIC CURVE  OF  DYNAMO  —  SHUNT,  SERIES  AND  COM- 
POUND   DYNAMO    -  -    ELECTROLYTIC    CELL    -  -    CHEMICAL 
RELATION  —  VOLT  —  AMPERE  —  OHM  —  WATT  —  POLAR- 
IZATION —  OPEN  CIRCUIT  CELLS  —  CLOSED  CIRCUIT  CELLS 
—  GRAVITY  CELL  —  DANIEL  CELL  —  STORAGE  BATTERY 

EDISON  STORAGE  CELL  OHM'S  LAW VOLTMETER  

AMMETER  METHOD  OF  MEASURING  RESISTANCE  —  SHUNT 
CIRCUIT  —  CELLS  IN  SERIES  OR  SHUNT  —  WHEATSTONE'S 
BRIDGE  —  RESISTANCE  BOX  —  INDUCTION  COIL  —  TRANS- 
FORMER —  ARC  LIGHT  —  INCANDESCENT  LAMP  —  CYCLE 

-  PHASE  —  ALTERNATOR  -  -  THREE    PHASE    A.  C.  - 
MOTORS  —  STARTING  BOX  —  CONTROLLER  —  RECORDING 
WATT-METER  —  A.  C.  MOTOR  —  INDUCTION  MOTOR  — 
TELEPHONE  —  STATIC  ELECTRICITY  --  LEYDEN  JAR  - 
ELECTROSCOPE    -  -   ELECTRIC    DISCHARGE    -  -   X-RAY   — 
HERTZEN  RAY  —  WIRELESS  TELEGRAPH. 

INDEX  197 


APPLIED   PHYSICS 


INTRODUCTION 

PHYSICS  has  more  points  of  contact  with  every-day  life 
than  any  other  one  science.  A  bicycle  rider  runs  into  a 
tree  and  is  hurt,  an  automobile  rounds  a  curve  too  fast 
and  skids.  In  either  case  a  policeman  may  step  to  a  little 
box,  fastened  to  a  pole,  and  call  an  ambulance.  Man 
with  his  little  strength  lifts  great  girders  weighing  many 
tons,  or  directs  a  huge  steamship  across  an  ocean,  or  makes 
a  waterfall  furnish  him  with  light,  heat,  and  power.  All 
this  is  in  accordance  with  the  laws  of  physics.  Physics 
has  to  do  with  matter  and  energy.  This  is  the  study  of 
the  laws  of  nature  which  control  everything  happening 
about  us.  Ignorance  of  the  law  excuses  no  one.  Nature's 
laws  will  hold  anyway  and  the  wise  man  will  learn  to  use 
them  to  his  advantage. 

Matter.  No  one  knows  what  matter  is.  There  is  a 
theory  that  it  may  be  made  up  of  molecules  and  these 
in  turn  formed  from  smaller  particles  called  atoms,  which 
are  in  turn  composed  of  smaller  particles.  In  accordance 
with  this  theory,  the  symbol  for  water  is  written  H2O, 
which  means  that  a  molecule  of  water  is  made  of  two 
atoms  of  hydrogen  and  one  atom  of  oxygen. 

Energy  is  the  ability  to  work.  We  shall  meet  energy 
in  many  forms,  chemical  energy,  electrical,  mechanical, 
heat,  light,  etc.  The  quantity  of  matter  and  of  energy 
in  the  universe  is  constant.  We  know  that  when  energy 
disappears  in  one  form  it  appears  in  another  form  with 

I 


2  INTRODUCTION 

no  change  in  amount  and  that  if  matter  disappears  in  one 
form  it  appears  in  another  and  that  the  amount  is  the  same. 
This  is  the  law  of  conservation  of  energy  and  of  matter. 

The  relations  of  energy  and  matter  are  so  exact  that 
physics  must  be  an  exact  mathematical  science.  The 
student  must  have  a  definite  set  of  units  to  compare  quan- 
tities, and  these  units  must  be  real  and  definite.  That  is, 
"inch"  must  be  not  simply  a  word,  it  must  be  a  definite 
length  which  is  suggested  by  the  word.  For  that  reason 
instead  of  trying  to  define  the  units  here,  we  shall  give  an 
introduction  to  them  in  the  first  experiments  in  the  labora- 
tory. We  use  a  convenient  decimal  system  of  money 
and  laugh  at  the  clumsy  English  system  of  pounds,  shillings, 
pence,  etc.,  and  yet  we  cling  to  the  English  system  of 
miles,  rods,  feet,  etc.,  while  the  continent  of  Europe  has  long 
been  using  a  decimal  system.  The  student  of  science  in  this 
country  will  need  to  be  familiar  with  both.  The  units  of 
both  systems  are  arbitrary,  that  is,  when  first  chosen  they 
could  as  well  have  been  different  but  they  have  now  been 
commonly  accepted  and  each  government  has  made  accurate 
duplicates  of  the  units  and  holds  them  as  standards.  In 
the  C.G.S.  (centimeter-gram-second)  system,  the  centimeter 
is  the  unit  of  length,  the  gram  the  unit  of  mass,  and  the  second 
the  unit  of  time.  Other  units  are  built  up  from  these. 

A  short  time  spent  in  the  laboratory  with  meter  stick  and 
yard  stick,  English  and  metric  weights,  will  be  of  more 
value  to  the  pupil  than  many  pages  of  explanation. 


CHAPTER  I 
MACHINES 

WE  see  a  hod  of  brick  carried  up  to  the  second  story  or 
a  heavy  barrel  rolled  up  a  skid  on  to  a  dray,  and  call  it 
work.  We  may  not  all  have  in  mind  the  same  definition 
of  work  and  the  same  unit  for  measuring  it.  If  you  hold  a 
five-pound  weight  out  at  arm's  length  all  day,  holding  it 
in  the  same  place  all  the  time,  do  you  do  any  work?  Place 
a  post  under  the  same  weight  holding  it  in  the  same  place 
and  leave  it  there  all  day.  The  post  will  have  to  do  the 
same  work  that  you  did.  Is  the  foundation  of  your  school 
building  doing  any  work  when  it  supports  the  weight  of 
the  walls?  What  is  work,  then?  If  a  weight  be  lifted 
from  the  bottom  of  a  clock  to  the  top  it  can  be  made  to 
turn  the  wheels  as  it  runs  down.  Water  stored  at  the  top 
of  a  hill  will  turn  the  mill  wheels  as  it  runs  down.  We  all 
know  from  experience  that  in  order  to  move  any  object  we 
must  give  it  either  a  push  or  a  pull,  which  we  call  force. 
Force  is  a  push  or  a  pull  which  tends  to  produce  motion. 
Work  is  force  acting  against  a  resistance  and  moving  it. 

When  we  wish  to  compare  distances,  we  have  the  units 
of  length  —  foot,  meter,  etc.  Without  them  the  architect 
could  not  make  specifications  for  the  contractor.  To  com- 
pare forces,  we  have  the  pound  unit,  which  is  the  pull  of 
gravity  upon  a  standard  weight  kept  by  the  government. 
The  unit  of  work,  the  foot-pound,  is  a  force  of  one  pound 
pushing  or  pulling  through  a  distance  of  one  foot.  A  ten- 
pound  weight  lifted  through  two  feet  would  require  2  X  10, 

3 


4  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

or  20  foot-pounds  of  work.  Work  requires  two  factors,  force 
and  the  distance  through  which  it  moves.  If  a  man  were 
hired  to  carry  two  tons  of  coal  upstairs  and  spent  the  day 
leaning  against  the  bin,  that  is,  pushing  against  it,  he  would 
accomplish  no  work.  Is  it  possible  to  exert  force  without 
doing  work?  How  much  work  is  done  when  a  130-pound 
boy  climbs  from  the  first  to  the  second  floor,  15  feet?  How 
much  work  is  done  when  the  same  boy  pushes  against  the 
side  of  the  house  for  half  an  hour?  If  a  pull  of  300  pounds 
pulls  a  car  along  a  track  for  10  feet,  10  X  300,  or  3000 
foot-pounds  of  work  is  done  overcoming  friction. 

Often  a  pry  or  lever  is  used  for  lifting  heavy  weights. 
In  Fig.  1,  if  a  force  be  applied  vertically  at  F  and  move 

the  distance  (a),  while  the 
lever  moves  about  the  pivot 
(p),  the  weight  is  lifted  the 
distance  (6). 

Every  boy  knows  that  he 
can  lift  many  times  his  own 
FIG.  1.  —  Lever.  weight    by    using    such    a 

By  a  lever  a  man  may  lift  many  lever.  He  also  knows  that 
times  his  own  weight  He  makes  the  distance  (6)  which  the 
use  of  the  principles  of  physics. 

weight  is  lifted  is  small  com- 
pared to  (a)  when  the  weight  is  heavy.  There  is  little  loss 
due  to  friction  in  the  lever.  Repeated  experiment  has  shown 
that  if  W  =  500  pounds  and  is  lifted  1  foot  while  F  drops 

5  feet,  F  must  be  100  pounds.     The  force  F  is  doing  work 
on  the  lever,  100  X  5,  or,  500  foot-pounds.     The  work  given 
back  is  500  X  1  =  500  foot-pounds.     The  work  given  out 
by  a  machine  can  never  be  more  than  the  work  done  on 
the  machine.     In  practice  a  part  of  the  work  done  on  the 
machine  is  used  by  friction  and  is  useless  work,   so  that 
the    useful    work    from    the   machine    is    only    a    fraction 
of  the  total  work  done  on  the  machine.     This  fraction 


MACHINES  5 

is  called  the  per  cent  efficiency.  A  machine  which,  for 
every  100  foot-pounds  of  work  received,  gives  back  75  has 
75%  efficiency.  If  we  could  build  machines  having  no  fric- 
tion they  would  have  100%  efficiency.  The  so-called  per- 
petual motion  machine  is  impossible. 

Neglecting  friction,  the  work  done  by  a  machine  is  equal 
to  the  work  done  on  the  machine.  Expressed  as  an 
equation,  F  X  D  =  W  X  d,  where  F  =  force  in  pounds, 
D  =  feet  the  force  moves,  W  =  resistance  in  pounds,  d  =  feet 
the  resistance  moves.  That  is,  neglecting  friction,  the  force 
times  the  distance  that  it  moves  equals  the  resistance  times 
the  distance  that  it  moves.  This  one  fundamental  prin- 
ciple of  machines  well  mixed  with  common  sense  will  work 
all  the  problems  in  simple  machines,  which  the  student  is 
likely  to  meet. 

In  Fig.  1  for  instance,  this  gives  usFXa  =  WXboT 

l/i/  sj  (If* 

TT=  -  but  by  similar  triangles  -  =  -•  thereforeFXc=TFX<i. 
r  o  o  d 

Force   times   the   force    arm  =  weight    times    the    weight 

^          .      Weight  distance  the  force  moves 

arm.    The  ratio  —  or 


Force  distance  the  weight  is  lifted 

is  called  the  mechanical  advantage  of  a  machine. 

Any  contrivance  for  transforming  or  transferring  energy 
is  a  machine.  There  are  six  simple  machines.  In  consider- 
ing machines,  never  forget  the  principle  already  stated  that 
the  total  amount  of  energy  in  the  universe  is  constant.  It 
is  not  possible  to  get  more  work  out  of  a  machine  than  is 
done  upon  it. 

In  the  operation  of  a  machine,  there  are  always  two  quan- 
tities of  work  to  be  considered,  the  work  done  upon  the 
machine  and  the  work  done  by  it.  The  work  done  by  the 
machine  equals  the  work  done  upon  it.  Some  of  the  work 
done  by  the  machine  may  be  used  up  in  overcoming  fric- 
tion. In  this  case  the  effective  work  done  by  the  machine 


6  APPLIED   PHYSICS 

is  less  than  the  work  done  upon  it.  The  ratio  of  the  use- 
ful work  to  the  total  work,  expressed  in  per  cent,  is  the  effi- 
ciency of  the  machine.  The  efficiency  of  a  simple  lever  may 
be  almost  100%.  The  efficiency  of  a  motor  may  amount  to 
85%.  The  efficiency  of  a  locomotive  may  be  about  10%. 

The  machine  elements  are  lever,  wheel  and  axle,  pulley, 
inclined  plane,  screw,  and  wedge.  Other  machines  are 
formed  by  combining  these. 

A  lever  is  a  bar  capable  of  being  turned  about  a  pivot, 
as  in  Figs.  2,  3,  and  4  where  F  is  the  force,  (p)  the  pivot  or 
fulcrum,  W  the  weight,  (a)  the  force  arm  and  (b)  the  weight 
arm. 


FIG.  2. 


I 

~> 


FIG.  4. 
Three  classes  of  levers,  one  law  W  X  b  =  F  X  a. 

The  force  times  the  force  arm  equals  the  weight  times 
the  weight  arm;  the  mechanical  advantage  of  the  lever 
also  equals  the  inverse  ratio  of  its  arms. 

In  the  lever  the  force  tends  to  turn  the  lever  one  way 
while  the  weight  tends  to  revolve  it  the  other  way.  This 
tendency  to  cause  rotation  is  called  a  moment. 

The  product  of  the  force  and  the  force  arm  is  its  moment 
and  the  product  of  the  weight  and  the  weight  arm  is  its 
moment.  In  the  lever  the  two  moments  are  equal  and 
opposite. 


MACHINES 


FIG.  5. 
Wheel  and  axle,  a 


The  wheel  and  axle,  Fig.  5,  is  a  modified  lever.  It  con- 
sists of  a  wheel  and  axle  rigidly  fastened 
together  to  turn  about  a  common  axis. 
It  is  evident  that  the  radius  of  the  axle  (r) , 
is  the  weight  arm,  and  the  radius  of  the 
wheel,  R,  is  the  force  arm.  The  wheel  may 
be  replaced  by  a  crank,  as  in  the  windlass. 

In  a  train  of  gear  wheels  the  resist- 
ance of  one  becomes  the  force  of  the  next, 
and  by  continued  application  of  the  laws 
of  the  lever  the  following  law  may  be 
obtained:  The  weight  times  the  continued 
product  of  the  radii  of  the  axles  equals  the 
force  times  the  continued  product  of  the  radii  lever  with  another 
of  the  wheels.  name' 

Pulleys.  Pulleys  for  the  transmission  of  power  by  means 
of  belts  are  readily  considered  by  means  of  the  principles  of 
the  wheel  and  axle.  Power  is  the  time  rate  of  doing  work. 
To  lift  a  ton  of  coal  from  the  basement  to  the  first  floor 
requires  the  same  number  of  foot-pounds  of  work  (weight 
times  distance  lifted)  whether  it  takes  a  week  or  a  minute. 
The  power  required  is  very  different;  33,000  foot-pounds  of 
work  per  minute  or  550  foot-pounds  per  second  is  one  horse- 
power. 

To  lift  231,000  pounds  5  feet  in  7  minutes  would  require 
5  X  231,000  or  1,155,000  foot-pounds  of  work  in  7  minutes 
or  165,000  foot-pounds  in  one  minute;  165,000  -f-  33,000  = 
5  horse-power. 

The  pulley  which  imparts  motion  to  the  belt  is  called 
the  driver;  that  which  receives  the  motion  is  called  the 
driven.  If  a  12-inch  and  a  6-inch  pulley  are  belted  together, 
the  6-inch  pulley  will  make  two  revolutions  while  the  12- 
inch  is  making  one.  The  number  of  revolutions  is  inversely 
proportional  to  the  diameters.  Rubber,  cotton,  and  leather 


8 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


belts  are  used.  The  force  tending  to  turn  the  pulley 
(effective  pull)  is  the  difference  between  the  tension  on  the 
slack  side  and  that  on  the  driving  side.  To  determine  what 
width  of  the  belt  to  use,  it  is  necessary  to  know  the  arc 
of  contact  on  the  small  pulley,  the  velocity  of  the  belt, 
the  power  to  be  transmitted,  and  a  constant  depending  upon 
the  friction  and  the  arc  of  contact. 


FIG.  6.  —  A  Lever. 

The  law  of  levers  is  easily  tested  and  demonstrated  by  simple  appa- 
ratus. Weight  X  weight  arm  =  Force  X  force  arm. 

Parallel  forces  are  also  illustrated.  The  sum  of  the  weights  and 
the  weight  of  the  meter  stick  equals  the  scale  reading.  A  team  of 
horses  pulling  on  an  evener  and  many  other  applications  should  be 
suggested  and  explained  by  this  picture. 

In  getting  the  length  of  a  belt  for  pulleys  not  yet  in  place, 
the  millwright  uses  the  approximate  rule  3J  times  half  the 
sum  of  the  diameters  of  the  two  pulleys  plus  twice  the 
distance  between  the  centers  of  the  pulleys.  This  will 
furnish  an  estimate  for  an  open  belt.  After  the  pulleys 


MACHINES  9 

are  in  place  a  tape  is  used  to  measure  the  length  required 
for  the  actual  cut. 

To  get  the  width  of  a  s'ngle  belt  let 

k   =  the  allowable  effective  pull  per  inch  given  above. 

H  =  the  horse-power  to  be  transmitted. 

v    =  the  velocity  of  belt  in  feet  per  minute. 

w  =  width  in  inches. 

33,000  H 
vk 

Do  not  learn  this  formula  but  study  it  until  the  reason 
for  each  part  is  understood,  and  then  analyze  each  problem, 
working  without  the  formula. 

33,000  H  gives  the  number  of  foot-pounds  of  work  per 
minute.  Work  is  the  product  of  force  times  distance  and 
the  velocity  in  feet  per  minute  of  the  belt  multiplied  by 
the  allowable  effective  pull  per  inch  of  width  gives  the 
number  of  foot-pounds  one  inch  width  will  do  per  minute. 
This  divided  into  the  number  to  be  done  per  minute  gives 
the  width  of  the  belt  required. 

What  width  of  belt  will  be  required  to  transmit  10  horse- 
power, the  speed  of  the  'belt  being  1,500  feet  per  minute 
and  the  arc  of  contact  being  135  degrees  on  the  small  pulley, 
if  the  allowable  pull  per  inch  width  is  31.3  pounds? 

10  X  33,000 
W=  1,500  X  3L3= 

It  is  evident  that  if  the  speed  is  increased  greater  power 
may  be  transmitted  at  the  same  tension. 

Problems 

1.  A  belt  running  1000  feet  per  minute  has  an  effective  pull  of 
33  pounds.     What  horse-power  is  it  transmitting? 

2.  What  effective  pull  must  a  belt  have  to  transmit  5  horse-power 
when  running  800  feet  per  minute?  when  running  1600  feet  per  minute? 


10  APPLIED   PHYSICS 

3.  The    driver  running   500  R.P.M.   (revolutions  per  minute)   is 
12  inches  in  diameter,  the  belt  is  six  inches  wide  with  an  effective  pull 
of  30  pounds  per  inch.     What  horse-power  is  it  transmitting?     The 
pupil  should  always  look  for  the  easiest  method  of  working  applied 
problems.     Note  here  that  the  surface   speed  must  be  in  feet  per 
minute.     Use  the  diameter  as  1  foot.     Use  -2/  for  Pi.     Indicate  the 
work  before  multiplying  any  of  it,  as  follows: 

1  X  22  X  500  X  6  X  30  = 
7  X  33000 

4.  A  driving  pulley  20  inches  in  diameter  makes  180  R.P.M.     What 
is  the  diameter  of  the  follower  making  450  R.P.M.? 

5.  A  main  line   shaft  running  200  R.P.M.  has  a  32-inch  driver 
belted  to  an  8-inch  follower  on  the  first  counter;  a  20-inch  driver  on  the 
first  counter  to  a  6-inch  driver  on  the  second  counter;  and  a  12-inch 
driver  on  the  second  counter  to  a  2|-inch  pulley  on  a  spindle.     Find 
the  R.P.M.  of  the  spindle. 

6.  What  width  of  belt  will  be  required  to  transmit  12  H.P.,  the 
speed  of  the  belt  being  1200  feet  per  minute  and  the  allowable  effective 
pull  40  pounds  per  inch  width? 

7.  If  both   driver   and   follower  in  problem   6   are    18  inches  in 
diameter  find  R.P.M.     What  is  the  effective  pull?     If  12-inch  pulleys 
are  substituted  on  both  driver  and  follower,  and  the  R.P.M.  and  H.P. 
remain  the  same,  how  are  width  of  belt,  effective  pull,  and  speed  of 
belt  affected?    <  \ 

Work  is  always  the  product  of  two  factors,  force  times  distance,  and 
power  is  rate  of  doing  work.  Whenever  a  problem  involves  quantity 
of  work,  look  for  the  two  factors. 

8.  In  Fig.  5  r  is  4  inches  and  R  is  12  inches  and  there  is  no  friction, 
What  force  will  be  required   to  balance  600  Ib.  at  Wf     If  \  of  the 
work  done  on  the  machine  is  lost  in  friction,  how  much  weight  will 
this  same  force  lift?     In  the  second  case  what  is  the  efficiency? 

In  Fig.  7  suppose  the  shafts  a  and  b  are  parallel,  the 
pulley  at  a  being  cone-shaped  as  shown.  The  circumfer- 
ence on  the  right-hand  side  being  larger  than  that  on  the 
left  the  belt  is  drawn  ahead  more  rapidly  than  the  other 
side  of  the  belt  and  the  belt  is  thrown  to  the  right  and  shows 
a  tendency  to  climb  to  the  large  side  of  the  cone.  Suppose 


MACHINES 


11 


the  pulley  is  made  of  two  cones  with  the  large  diameters 
placed  together.  The  belt  will  be  held  in  place  as  each  side 
will  tend  to  climb  toward  the  center.  This  is  done  by 
crowning  the  pulley  as  in  c. 


Problems 

1.  In  pulling  a  railroad  spike  a  crowbar  is  used  in  which  the  long 
arm  is  4  feet  and  the  claw  is  3  inches  long.     If  it  requires  a  force  of 
50  pounds  to  pull  the  spike,  what  is  the  resistance  of  the  spike? 

2.  In  the  forge  room  the  machine  for  cutting  bar  iron  has  a  lever 
6  feet  long,  with  the  knife  connected  4  inches  from  the  pivot  end; 
the  knife  is  2  feet  long  with  a 

bar  of  iron  placed  under  it  2 
inches  from  the  pivot  end. 
When  a  boy  pulls  100  pounds  on 
the  end  of  the  lever,  what  is  the 
pressure  on  the  bar  of  iron? 
What  is  the  strain  on  each 
pivot? 

3.  A    belt    with    a    speed    of 
1000    feet    per    minute    has    an 
effective  pull  of  33  pounds.    How 
much  work  is  it  doing  per  min- 
ute?    What    horse-power    is    it 
transmitting? 

4.  Twelve  boys  weighing  110 
Ib.  each  are  lifted  from  the  base- 
ment to  the  third  floor,  40  feet. 
How  much  work  is  done,  neg- 
lecting    friction?     What     horse- 
power would  be  required  if  this 


FIG.  7. 

A  belt  will  run  better  on  a  crowned 
pulley  than  on  a  flat  one. 


takes  one  minute?  Two  minutes? 

5.  If  5000  pounds  of  water  per  day  are  pumped  from  the  basement 
to  the  fountain  on  the  third  floor,  45  feet,  how  much  useful  work  is 
done?  If  the  friction  of  the  pump  uses  one  fifth  the  energy  supplied, 
how  much  work  must  be  done  on  the  pump?  If  the  motor  running 
the  pump  has  60%  efficiency,  how  many  foot-pounds  of  electrical 
energy  will  be  required  by  the  motor?  What  horse-power  motor  must 
be  used? 


12 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


Pulleys  are  also  used  for  raising  or  hoisting  loads  in  which 
case  the  frame  supporting  the  axle  of  the 
pulley  is  a  block. 

A  fixed  pulley  is  one  whose 
block  is  not  movable.  A  mov- 
able pulley  is  one  whose  block 
is  movable. 

If  a  boy  weighing  100  pounds 
be  in  a  swing  each  rope  sup- 
ports 50  pounds.  If  a  weight 
of  20  pounds  be  supported  by 
one  movable  pulley  as  in  Fig.  8, 
each  rope  is  under  a  tension  of 
10  pounds.  By  extending  this 
principle  we  may  state  the  law 
that  in  any  combination  of  pul- 
leys where  one  continuous  rope  is  used  the 
mechanical  advantage  is  equal  to  the  num- 
ber of  times  the  rope  passes  from  one  block 
to  another.  In  actual  practice  it  is  found 
that  the  efficiency  runs  from  60%  to  90%, 
depending  upon  the  condition  and  num- 
ber of  the  sheaves. 

A  combination  of  pulleys  frequently 
used  has  three  sheaves  (wheels)  in  each 
block.  There  are  six  ropes  running  be- 
tween the  blocks.  If  we  neglect  friction, 
when  a  force  of  100  pounds  is  exerted 


100  Lbs, 
FIG.  8. 

Each  rope 
must  sup- 
port part 
of  the 
load. 


FIG.  9. 


Block  and  tackle, 
jfor  lifting  heavy  ob- 

on  the  free  end  of  the  rope,  each  rope  is    Jec,ff • 

Man  applies  the 
put  under  a  strain  of  100  pounds  and  a    laws  of  physics,  and 

weight  of  600  pounds  will  be  supported,    machines  save  much 
T  of  his  heavy  drudg- 

ln  order  to  remove  one  foot  of  rope  from    ery  and  do  many 

each  of  the  six  supporting  the  weight  the    thmss  beyond  the 
,  strength      of      the 

force  must  move  through  six  feet.  See  Fig.  9.    strongest  animal. 


MACHINES  13 

An  inclined  plane  is  one  making  an  angle  with  the  hori- 
zontal as  in  Fig.  10.  Where  the  force  acts  parallel  to  the 
plane,  as  in  Fig.  10,  the 
effort  must  move  through  a 
distance  equal  to  the  length 
while  the  load  is  lifted 
through  the  height  (h).  The 
mechanical  advantage  is 
l/h.  If  a  plank  16  feet 

long  be  used  in  lifting  a  weight  of  600  pounds  up  to  a 
platform  4  feet  high,  and  the  force  be  applied  parallel 
to  the  plank,  what  effort  will  be  required  to  move  it? 
16  -f-  4  =  4,  the  mechanical  advantage.  600  -f-  4  =  150 
pounds  required,  neglecting  friction. 

When  the  force  is  applied  parallel  to  the  base  the  me- 
chanical advantage  is  the  base  (6),  divided  by  the  height  (h). 

A  special  application  of  the  inclined  plane  is  the  wedge. 
It  may  be  used  for  moving  heavy  weights  or  in  the  form 
of  key  used  in  fastening  crank  to  crank  shaft. 

If  a  right  triangle  be  wound  around  a  cylinder  with  one 
leg  forming  the  circumference,  the  hypotenuse  takes  the 
form  of  a  helix.  A  helical  projection  winding  around  the 
circumference  of  a  cylinder  forms  a  screw.  The  projection 
is  the  thread,  the  distance  between  the  threads  is  the  lead, 
the  number  of  threads  to  the  inch  is  the  pitch.  In  the  case 
of  the  jack  screw  for  lifting  heavy  weights,  the  effort  is 
applied  to  the  end  of  the  lever.  When  the  screw  makes  a 
complete  revolution  the  weight  is  lifted  through  a  distance 
equal  to  the  lead,  while  the  effort  moves  through  the  cir- 
cumference of  a  circle  with  a  lever  as  a  radius.  It  is  found 
in  practice  that  the  friction  is  so  great  that  the  screw  will 
lift  only  about  one-fifth  of  the  theoretical  weight,  that  is, 
its  efficiency  is  only  about  20%.  With  a  screw  having  four 
threads  to  the  inch  a  man  exerts  a  force  of  40  pounds  at 


14  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

the  end  of  a  four-foot  lever.     What  theoretical  load  can  he 
lift?     If  the  efficiency  is  20%,  what  load  can  he  actually  lift? 

Problems 

1.  Two  beams  are  fastened  together   with  a  bolt  which  has  an 
8-pitch  thread.     A  monkey-wrench  one  foot  long  is  used  to  tighten  the 
nut.     If  a  force  of  50  pounds  be  exerted  and  one  half  be  lost  in  fric- 
tion, how  tight  are  the  timbers  squeezed?     (Use  Pi  as  87  and  get  only 
approximate  result  mentally.) 

2.  A  skid  16  feet  long  is  used  in  pushing  an  800-pound  barrel  on  to 
a  dray  4  feet  high.    "What  push  must  be  exerted  against  the  barrel? 
How  much  work  is  done?     (Find  the  work  in  two  ways.) 

3.  In  pushing  an  800-pound  barrel  on  to  a  platform,  the  skid  forms 
an  angle  of  30°  with  the  horizontal  plane.     What  force  is  required? 

4.  A  weight  of  141  pounds  rests  on  a  plane  which  is  at  45°  to  the 
horizontal.     What  force  is  required  to  hold  it  in  place? 

The  micrometer,  Fig.  11,  much  used  in  machine  shops,  is 
an  application  of  the  principle  of  the  screw.  The  screw  (a) 

is  40  pitch.  The  thim- 
ble (b)  is  fast  to  the 
screw.  The  beveled 
edge  of  b  is  divided 
into  25  equal  parts. 
Fastened  firmly  to  the 
FIG.  11.  — Micrometer  Caliper.  frame  is  a  sleeve  (c) 

Accurate  measurements  and  fine  ad-  uPon  which  is  a  scale 
justments  in  modern  shop  practice  are  corresponding  to  the 
made  by  means  of  the  micrometer  screw.  ,  -,  £  ,-,  , , 

lead  of  the  screw,  that 

is,  each  division  is  ?V  or  .025  of  an  inch. 

When  screw  (a)  is  against  anvil  (d)  the  zero  lines  coincide. 
Then  each  complete  turn  of  the  screw  (a)  represents  a  longi- 
tudinal movement  of  .025  inch.  One  division  on  b  means 
^V  of  a  turn  and  therefore  a  separation  of  the  jaws  A- 
of  41,)  or  .001  inch.  Fig.  12  shows  a  sleeve  reading  of  .325 
inch  and  thimble  reading  of  .017  or  a  total  of  .342  inch. 


MACHINES 


15 


Problems 

1.    State  the  general  rule  of  machines,  expressing  the  relation  be- 
tween force  and  weight  and  the  distances  through  which  they  move. 


.342" 


FIG.  12 


2.    If  the  force  arm  of  a  lever  is  20  inches  and  the  weight  arm  is 
inches,  what  force  will  be  required  to  lift  a  weight  of  100  pounds? 


' 

-<  

-8 

d                      E 

-6- 

> 

I 

J                                        L 

t 

ti 

•  8  • 

* 

[, 

-T 

\ 

t 

^                                         < 

'1 

f 

-2 

f                    — 

12 

> 

^> 

^ 

PH* 

P4 

v_<  

FIG.  13.  —  Pulley  Cone,  Problem  9. 

By  running  the  belt  on  different  combinations,  several  speeds 
may  be  obtained  for  the  machine. 

3.   What  must  be  the  speed  of  the  driver,  12  inches  in  diameter,  in 
order  that  the  driven,  with  a  diameter  of  5  inches,  may  make  1 000  R .  P .  M .  ? 


16 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


4.  A  single  belt  running  at  1650  feet  per  minute  is  used  to  transmit 
40  horse-power.     If  the  allowable   pull  per    inch    width  is  35    lb., 
what  width  of  belt  will  be  required? 

5.  In  a  set  of  pulleys  there  are  three  wheels  in  the  movable  block 
and  six  ropes  passing  from  one  block  to  another  neglecting  friction, 
what  force  will  be  necessary  to  lift  1200  pounds?     If  the  efficiency  of 
this  combination  is  only  80%,  what  load  will  the  same  force  lift?    What 
is  the  mec'hanical  advantage  of  this  combination? 


FIG.  14.  —  The  Principles  of  Simple  Machines. 
Simple  apparatus  for  demonstrating  the  principles  of  simple  machines. 

6.  If  a  railroad  track  has  a  rise  of  6  inches  in  200  feet  of  its  length, 
what  force  pulling  on  the  draw  bar  will  be  necessary  to  hold  a  car 
without  friction,  weighing  10  tons  and  loaded  with  40  tons?     If  the 
same  car  is  being  pulled  up  this  incline  20  feet  per  second,  what  horse- 
power is  used?     If  200  pounds  pull  is  necessary  to  overcome  the  fric- 
tion of  the  car,  what  horse-power  is  used  in  overcoming  friction  at  the 
above  rate? 

7.  Measure  the  chain  of  gears  on  a  planer  in  the  machine  shop 
and  compute  the  mechanical  advantage. 


MACHINES 


17 


8.  There  are  several  screw  presses  in  the  building.  Neglecting 
friction,  find  the  pressure  exerted  by  ten  pounds  pull  on  the  wheel  of 
one  of  them. 

9.  If  in  the  turning  shop  the  shaft  has  a  speed  of  500  R.P.M. 
and  a  pulley  cone  is  used  having  diameters  6,  8,  10,  and  12 
inches  while  a  lathe  has  a  pul- 
ley cone  with  diameters  of  8, 
6,  4,  and  2  inches,  what  speed 
will  the  lathe  have  on  each 
combination?  See  Fig.  13. 

10.  In  the  first  combina- 
tion of  the  above  problem, 
what  effective  pull  must  the 
belt  have  to  transmit  3  horse- 
power? 

The  Prony  brake  is 
commonly  used  to  meas- 
ure the  delivered  or  brake 
horse-power  of  an  engine 
or  the  brake  horse-power 
at  the  shafting  in  any 
part  of  a  shop.  As  shown 
in  the  Fig.  16,  two  pieces 
of  timber  are  fitted  to  a 
pulley  and  placed  as 
shown.  A  long  lever  arm 
L  is  bolted  to  the  pieces, 
and  with  the  pulley 
standing  still  a  weight  (x) 
is  placed  to  balance  the  arm  L.  The  pulley  is  revolved  left- 
handedly  at  speed  and  a  weight  (w]  gradually  added  until  the 
friction  on  p  is  all  it  will  carry  and  stay  up  to  speed.  Horse- 
power is  speed  in  feet  per  minute  multiplied  by  force  divided 
by  33,000.  Surface  speed  =  2^Nr}  and  force  =  WR/r. 


FIG.  15.  —  The  Principles  of   Simple 
Machines. 

Simple   apparatus  for  demonstrating 
the  principles  of  simple  machines. 


Therefore,    the   foot-pounds   per   minute  = 
3 


and 


18  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

2v&NW 

the  r  divides  out,  hence  the  horse-power  =  ~oo~7jrjrT 

N  =  Revolutions  per  minute. 

W  =  weight. 

R   =  arm  in  feet. 


QlP 


w 

J||j        'llll 


FIG.  16.  —  The  Prony  Brake. 


A  brake  with  an  arm  5  feet  long  was  placed  on  a  gas 
engine.  The  pulley  made  300  revolutions  per  minute  and 
the  brake  balanced  with  a  twelve-pound  weight.  What 
horse-power  was  developed? 

2  X  3.1416  X  5  X  300  X  12 

-33^00-  -°r3'4 

Problems 

1.  Work  is  the  product  of  two  factors,  force  and  distance.     Where 
do  these  two  appear  in  the  formula  for  the  Prony  brake? 

2.  Where  do  the  two  factors  of  work  appear  when  power  is  being 
transmitted  from  a  shaft  to  a  machine  by  means  of  pulleys  and  belt.? 

3.  Why  has  every  perpetual  motion  machine  so  far  invented  failed 
to  work? 

4.  How  might  a  micrometer  be  constructed  to  read  to  1/500  of 
an  inch? 

5.  If  a  train  is  pulled  at  a  uniform  speed  along  a  level  track,  is 
any  work  done  against  gravity  ?     Is  any  work  done  ?     If  so  what 
becomes  of  the  energy  thus  used  ? 


MACHINES 


19 


lliw 


FxR=Wx 


M-'    Weston 
R-r          Different] 
-W^~  .Pulley 


FIGS.  17,  18,  19. 

Start  with  general  principle  of  machines.  (Neglecting  friction,  the 
force  times  the  distance  it  moves  equals  the  resistance  times  the  distance  it 
moves}  prove  the  formulae,  opposite  Figs.  17,  18,  and  19. 

Problems 

1.  In  testing  a  small  motor  with  the  Prony  brake,  the  brake  arm  is  30 
inches  long,  weight  3  pounds,  motor  running  900  R.P.M.     Find  brake 
horse-power. 

2.  An  engine  making  200  R.P.M.  will  support  500  pounds  at  the 
end  of  a  six-foot  lever.     What  is  the  horse-power? 

3.  A   gasoline   engine  making  1100   R.P.M.   balances   a  25-pound 
weight  at  the  end  of  a  4-foot  lever.     What  is  the  horse-power  ? 

4.  If  in   Fig.  5,  R  is  a  crank   15  inches   long    (r)  is  2  inches  and 
the  rope  (w)  is  fastened  to  F  of  Fig.  9,  what  load  (w)  will  a  force  of 
100  pounds  lift  if  the  combined  machine  works  at  60%  efficiency? 
How  far  will  the  crank  move  to  lift  the  weight  5  feet? 


20 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


6.  If  the  front  sprocket  of  a  bicycle  contains  27  teeth  and  the 
rear  one  9,   how  far  will  the  wheel  move  along  the  ground  while 
the  pedal  makes  one  turn  ?    How  many  turns  of  the  pedal  per  mile  ? 

7.  If  the  crank  (problem  6)  is  7  inches  long  how  far  does  the 

wheel  move  along  the  ground  while 
the  pedal  moves  one  foot  ? 

8.  When  the  crank  is  in  the  hori- 
zontal position  what  is  the  mechani- 
cal advantage  ?     If  the  efficiency  is 
80  %  how  much  is  the  forward  push 
when  a  force  of  50  pounds  is  exerted 
on  the  pedal  ? 

9.  What   is    the   "gear"   of  the 
above  bicycle  ?     Why  will  a  low  gear 
climb  hills  better  than  a  high  gear? 
Why  will  a  high  gear  run  faster  than  a 
low  gear  on  a  smooth  level  pavement  ? 

10.  Suppose  R  be  4|  inches  and  r 
be  4  inches  and  a  force  of  100  pounds 
be  exerted  at  F,  Fig.  19,  what  load 
can  be  lifted?     Consider  the  efficiency 
to  be  75%. 

11.  Refer  to  Fig.  13,  page  15.   With 
the  driver    running   at    500  R.P.M. 
compare  the  speed  of  the  driven  and 
the    mechanical    advantage    of    each 
combination. 

12.  A   shaft   and   a    counter-shaft 
each  have  a  pulley  one  foot   in  di- 
ameter.    The  shaft  runs  1000  R.P.M. 
and    4    horse-power   is    being    trans- 
mitted, find   speed  of  belt,  effective 
pull,  and  R.P.M.  of  counter-shaft  if 

FIG.  20.  — Weston  Differential    there  is  no  sliP-      Find  the  same  if 
Pulley.  pulleys  2  feet  in  diameter  are  substi- 

The  wheels  of  the  pulley  are    tuted  on  both  line  shaft  and  counter- 
fastened  rigidly  together.     One    shaft, 
wheel   is  a  little  larger   than 
the  other  and   revolving   the 
wheels  once   lifts   the  weight 
half  the  difference  between  the 
circumferences. 


CHAPTER  II 
DYNAMICS 

DYNAMICS  treats  of  force  producing  motion.  Watch  a 
locomotive  starting  a  heavy  freight  train.  How  slowly  the 
train  starts.  It  gradually  moves  faster  and  faster  until 
it  is  at  full  speed.  When  the  breaks  are  set  the  friction 
with  the  rails  pulls  back  on  the  train  and  soon  stops  it.  If 
a  train  runs  at  high  speed  around  a  curve  it  presses  against 
the  outer  rail.  We  might  say  the  outer  rail  pushes  against 
the  train  pushing  it  out  of  a  straight  line.  If  you  tie  a 
string  to  a  lead  ball  and  swing  it  in  a  circle  you  must  pull 
on  the  string  to  keep  the  ball  in  the  curved  path.  Such  a 
push  or  pull  is  called  force.  That  which  changes  or  tends 
to  change  motion  in  direction  or  quantity  is  force. 

If  you  push  against  the  side  of  a  building,  the  building 
will  not  move,  yet  if  you  exert  the  same  push  on  a  light 
wagon  it  will  move.  In  each  case  you  used  force,  but  in  one 
case  motion  is  produced  and  not  in  the  other,  because  the 
resistance  is  too  great.  We  found  that  work  expressed 
in  foot-pounds  required  two  factors,  force  times  distance. 
We  must  agree,  then,  that  force  may  be  exerted  without 
doing  any  work,  as  when  you  push  against  the  side  of  a 
house. 

Motion  is  change  of  position  with  reference  to  some  other 
body.  On  a  fast  train  one  day  a  mother  said  to  her  little 
girl,  "  Now,  Susan,  do  sit  still."  The  train  was  running  60 
miles  an  hour  which  is  88  feet  per  second.  What  do  you 
think  about  sitting  still?  The  rate  of  motion,  the  speed, 

21 


22  APPLIED   PHYSICS 

the  number  of  units  of  space  passed  over  in  one  unit  of  time, 
is  velocity.  Velocity  may  be  either  constant  or  variable. 
When  the  velocity  is  variable  the  change  in  speed  per  unit 
time  is  called  acceleration  and  may  be  either  an  increase 
or  decrease  in  speed. 

Forces  can  be  compared  only  by  their  tendency  to  pro- 
duce or  change  motion.  Sir  Isaac  Newton  stated  the 
.relation  between  force  and  motion  in  three  laws: 

1.  All  bodies  continue  in  a  state  of  rest,  or  of  uniform 
motion  in  a  straight  line,  unless  acted  upon  by  some  external 
force  that  compels  a  change. 

2.  Every  change  of  motion  is  proportional  to  the  acting 
force,  and  takes  place  in  the  direction  in  which  the  force 
acts. 

3.  To  every  force  there  is  always  an  equal  reaction  in 
the  opposite  direction. 

The  first  law,  often  called  the  law  of  inertia,  states  that 
a  body  once  put  in  motion  by  any  force  will  keep  on  forever 
in  a  straight  line  unless  some  force  acts  upon  it.  Inertia 
is  not  a  force,  and  should  not  be  considered  as  such.  A  car 
moving  with  a  high  velocity  may  strike  a  blow  upon  a 
stationary  body  and  expend  considerable  energy  in  doing 
damage.  The  force  which  it  exerts  is  not  force  of  inertia 
but  is  due  to  inertia.  The  amount  of  work  it  is  able 
to  do  while  coming  to  rest  is  the  same  as  the  amount 
of  work  done  upon  it  in  starting  it  from  rest  to  the  given 
velocity.  Inertia  has  enabled  it  to  store  the  energy  in 
itself. 

The  second  law  has  many  important  applications.  If 
a  ball  be  thrown  due  north  and  the  wind  is  blowing  from  the 
east,  the  ball  will  be  blown  out  of  a  straight  line  and  toward 
the  west.  The  distance  it  is  moved  toward  the  west  will 
depend  upon  the  velocity  of  the  wind  and  will  be  the  same 
per  second  regardless  of  its  velocity  toward  the  north. 


DYNAMICS 


23 


<  100  —  J<  100  —  > 

<  100  > 

<  —  100  —  > 

— 

"~—  -.^ 

16.1 

~~"^N^          6 

.4 

^ 

^x              H 

.9 

1 

\  , 

25 

.6 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

( 

") 

\ 
I 

) 

FIG.  21. 


Two  marbles,  shot  out  from  a  table  top,  one  to  fall  straight 
down  and  the  other  shot  out  in  a  horizontal  direction,  will 
strike  the  floor  at  the  same  time.  See  Fig.  21. 

We  see  that  gravity  acted  on  each  ball  in  exactly  the  same 
way,  and  produced  the  same  downward  motion  regardless 
of  other  motion.  This  is 
all  as  it  should  be,  as 
stated  in  the  second  law 
of  motion.  A  more  com- 
plete explanation  of  the 
term  " change  of  motion" 
will  be  found  on  page  27. 

A  boy  weighing  120 
pounds  can  usually  lift 
more  than  his  own  weight. 
Now,  suppose  he  stands 

in  the  rings  in  the  gymnasium  and  taking  a  rope  in  each 
hand  lifts  150  pounds.  He  weighs  only  120  pounds.  Will 
he  lift  himself  any  farther  than  the  ceiling  of  the  gymna- 
sium? Explain  this  by  the  third  law  of  motion. 

When  two  or  more  forces  act  upon  a  body  at  the  same 
time   at   a   common   point,    their    combined    effect,    called 

the  resultant,  may  be  found  by 
the  parallelogram  of  the  forces. 
A  force  may  be  represented 
by  a  straight  line,  the  direc- 
tion being  the  direction  of  the 
force  and  the  length  being  the 
force  drawn  to  scale.  If  two 
forces  (a)  and  (6)  act  on  a  body 
at  A  as  in  Fig.  22,  draw  the  line  in  the  direction  of  the 
forces  and  lay  them  off  to  some  convenient  scale.  Com- 
plete the  parallelogram  as  in  22,  and  the  diagonal  represents 
the  resultant  force  both  in  direction  and  size.  A  third 


FIG.  22.  —  Parallelogram  of 
Forces. 

a  and  6  combine  to  produce 
the  resultant  r. 


24 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


force  acting  at  A,  equal  and  opposite  to  r,  will  balance  the 
forces  a  and  6  and  prevent  motion. 

For  an  application  of  the  parallelogram  of  forces  refer 


FIG.  23.  —  Proving  the  Parallelogram  of  Forces. 

The  resultant  of  A  and  B  is  equal  to  and  opposite  C.     A  tug  of  war 
with  the  opposing  teams  evenly  matched. 

to  Fig.  24.     The  end  pole  of  a  telephone  line  of  6  wires 
must  be  held  in  by  a  guy  wire.     Each  line  is  under  tension 


DYNAMICS  25 

of  about  200  pounds.  The  guy  is  fastened  at  45°,  how  much 
will  it  have  to  pull?  The  guy  is  made  by  twisting  together 
wires.  If  each  wire  will  hold  500  pounds  before  breaking, 
and  two  extra  are  to  be  put  in  for  safety,  how  many  wires 
must  be  used  in  the  guy? 

The  parallelogram  of  forces  may  be  used  in  explaining 


1600 


FIG.  24. 

The  "Line  Boss"  often  estimates  the  number  of  wires  needed  in 
a  guy  by  drawing  a  parallelogram  in  the  dust  of  the  road. 

the  flight  of  a  kite  or  of  the  heavier-than-air  flying  machine, 
the  aeroplane.  The  kite  is  pulled  forward  by  a  string  or  the 
aeroplane  is  forced  forward  in  the  direction  d,  Fig.  25,  by  the 
action  of  the  propeller.  This  motion  causes  the  air  resistance 


26 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


to  develop  a  pressure  against  the  plane  in  the  direction  c 

-y  perpendicular  to  the  plane. 
This  may  be  resolved  into 
two  forces,  one,  a,  resisting 
the  motion  of  the  plane, 
and  one,  b,  opposed  to  the 
weight  of  the  machine. 
If  the  speed  be  great  and 
the  planes  are  large  the 
portion  b  will  be  equal  to 

or  greater  than  the  weight  and  the  plane  will  rise.     Means  of 

stability  and  steering  must  be  provided  by  auxiliary  planes 

and  rudders. 


Problems 

1.  Neglecting  weight  of  6, 
Fig.  27,  what  is  the  tension 
on  c  ?    Compare  with  Fig.  22. 

2.  If  in  the  Fig.  27  the 
weight  of   b   be  50  pounds, 
how  much  does  it  add  to  the 
tension  of  c? 

3.  If  in  Fig.  24  the  guy 
wire  makes  an  angle  of  60° 
with    the    horizontal,     how 
many  strands  must  be  placed 
in  the  guy? 

When  a  locomotive 
starts  a  heavy  train  from 
rest,  it  does  not  reach  full 
speed  at  once  but  in- 
creases its  rate  of  motion 
slowly.  If  you  kick  a 


FlG 


football  and  some  boy  has  made  a  mistake  on  the  first  of 
April  and  filled  the  ball  with  lead  instead  of  air,  you  will 


DYNAMICS 


27 


find  that  a  heavy  body  does  not  start  from  rest  easily. 

This  helplessness  of  matter  is  Inertia.      Inertia  causes  a 

body  in  motion  to  keep  on 

in   a   straight    line    unless 

acted  on  by  some  force;    it 

keeps  a  body  at  rest  from 

starting  unless  some  force 

starts  it.     Inertia  is  a  prop-  a 

erty  of  all  matter  and   is 

proportional  to  the  amount 

of  matter  present.     In  the 

case  of  the  train  starting, 

it  takes  time  and  force  to 


The  Force  Polygon. 
FIG.  27. 


500  Lbs. 


overcome  the  inertia  of  the 

train,  and  when  the  train 

is  running  60  miles  per  hour  it  takes  time  and  force  to 

stop  it. 

Suppose  a  locomotive  be  coupled  to  a  heavy  train  which 
is  carried  on  such  perfect  bearings  that  it  has  no  friction. 
If  the  engine  pulls  for  one  second  it  will  start  the  train  a 
little.  If  the  coupling  breaks  at  the  end  of  the  second,  the 
train  will  run  during  the  next  second  with  a  constant  speed. 
Suppose  the  train  starts  from  rest  and  at  the  end  of  one 
second  has  a  speed  of  one  foot  per  second,  that  is,  if  left 
to  itself,  would  run  one  foot  the  next  second.  At  the  end  of 
two  seconds  it  has  a  speed  of  two  feet  per  second,  at  the  end 
of  three  seconds  it  has  a  velocity  of  three  feet  per  second,  and 
so  on  until  it  is  running  at  full  speed.  The  increase  in  speed 
per  unit  time  is  acceleration,  and  in  this  case  is  the  same  each 
second  and  is  therefore  uniform  acceleration.  The  speed  in- 
creases one  foot  per  second  every  second.  That  is,  if  we  have 
a  body  free  to  move  without  friction  and  couple  a  force  which 
exerts  the  same  pull  all  the  time  in  one  direction,  the  body 
will  begin  to  move  slowly  at  first  and  at  the  end  of  one 


28  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

second  will  have  a  certain  speed.  At  the  end  of  two  seconds 
it  will  have  twice  as  great  a  speed  and  at  the  end  of  three 
seconds  three  times  as  much  speed  and  so  on.  Such  a  force 
is  a  constant  force,  and  such  increase  of  speed  is  constant 
or  uniform  acceleration,  and  the  motion  is  uniformly  accel- 
erated motion.  The  velocity  equals  the  acceleration  times 
the  time  if  the  body  starts  from  rest.  V  =  at  is  the  same 
thing  in  a  formula  which  must  be  learned. 

A  train  starting  from  Chicago  runs  for  a  while  at  50 
miles  per  hour;  after  stopping  at  a  small  station  it  runs 
at  a  slower  speed  for  a  time.  At  the  end  of  five  hours  it 
is  found  that  including  all  stops  and  changes  of  speed  it 
has  averaged  30  miles  per  hour.  How  far  has  it  traveled? 
You  answer  at  once  150  miles  or  the  average  speed  times 
the  time  equals  the  distance  traveled.  If  a  body  starts 
from  rest  and  moves  with  a  uniform  acceleration  so  that 
its  increase  in  speed  is  4  feet  per  second  each  second,  at 
the  end  of  three  seconds  it  will  have  a  velocity  of  4  X  3  or 
12  feet  per  second.  Experiments  have  shown  that  its 
average  speed  is  the  average  of  the  speed  at  the  beginning 
and  at  the  end  of  the  time  when  it  has  uniform  accelera- 
tion. In  this  case  the  average  of  0  and  12  is  (0  +  12)  -f- 
2  =  6.  The  distance  traveled  is  6  X  3  =  18  feet.  Sup- 
pose the  body  has  an  acceleration  of  a  feet  per  second 
each  second,  then  at  the  end  of  t  seconds  its  speed  will  be 
v  =  at  feet  per  second.  Its  average  speed  is  (at  +  0)  -r- 
2  or  |a£.  The  distance  traveled  is  the  time  (t)  multiplied 
by  the  average  velocity,  (?at),  that  is  (\at)  X  t  =  JaZ2. 
The  formula  is  written  S  =  %at2.  S  is  the  distance  traveled, 
a  the  acceleration  per  second,  and  t  the  time  in  seconds. 

Sometimes  we  wish  to  find  the  distance  traveled  in  any 
one  second,  as  the  fifth  second.  Suppose  a  body  starting 
from  rest  receives  a  uniform  acceleration  of  6  feet  per  second 
each  second,  how  far  will  it  travel  in  the  fifth  second?  Its 


DYNAMICS 


29 


velocity  at  the  end  of  5  seconds  is  5  X  6  =  30  feet  per  second. 
At  the  beginning  of  the  fifth  second  it  is  4  X  6  =  24  feet  per 
second.  The  average  velocity  is  J  (30  +  24)  or  27.  The 
distance  traveled  for  the  fifth  second  is  the  average  velocity, 


FIG.  28.  —  Stick,  String,  and  Spring  Balance. 

Only  a  stick,  string,  and  spring  balance  required  to  illustrate  several 
important  applications  of  physics  in  trusses,  hoisting  cranes,  etc. 
Every  student  of  physics  should  experiment  with  several  combina- 
tions, and  apply  his  results  to  many  local  illustrations.  See  Figs. 
22  and  23. 


30  APPLIED    PHYSICS 

27,  multiplied  by  the  time,  or  27  X  1  =  27  feet.  For  the 
general  formula  find  out  how  far  a  body  receiving  uniform 
acceleration  travels  the  second  (t)  which  may  be  the  fifth 
or  any  other  second.  At  the  end  of  the  second  (t)  the 
velocity  is  at.  At  the  beginning  of  the  second  it  is  (at  —  a). 
The  average  speed  is  (at  +  at  —  a)  -r-  2  or  fa  (2t  —  1). 
The  distance  traveled  is  the  time,  1  second,  multiplied  by 
the  average  velocity  fa  (2t  —  1),  or  d  =  la  (2t  —  1)  where 
d  is  the  distance  traveled  in  any  one  second. 

The  three  formulas  for  uniformly  accelerated  motion 
then  are  v  =  at;  S  =  \a&;  d  =  fa  (2t  -  1). 

The  best  example  of  a  constant  force  producing  uniform 
acceleration  in  a  body  free  from  friction  is  gravity  acting 
upon  a  freely  falling  body.  Experiment  has  shown  that 
the  acceleration  due  to  gravity  differs  a  little  in  different 
parts  of  the  earth  but  is  about  32.2  feet,  or  980  cms.  per 
second  each  second.  In  working  with  falling  bodies  the  form- 
ulas explained  above  are  used;  g  is  susbtituted  for  a  and  the 
formulas  then  become  S  =  \g$;  v  =  gt;  d  =  %g(2t  —  1). 

Problems 

1.  If  a  train  pulling  out  of  a  station  has  an  acceleration  of  \  foot 
per  second,  what  velocity  would  it  have  at  the  end  of  20  seconds?     1 
minute?     2  minutes,  56  seconds?     How  many  miles  per  hour  is  the 
last  velocity?     How  far  will  the  train  travel  the  first  second,  first 
20  seconds,  first  minute? 

2.  A  train  running  60  miles  per  hour  has  its  brake  set  and  slows 
down  at  the  rate  of  two  feet  per  second.     How  long  will  it  take  to 
stop  it?     How  far  will  it  go  before  stopping? 

3.  A  stone  falls  from  the  top  of  a  cliff  in  three  seconds.     How  high 
is  the  cliff?     With  what  velocity  does  the  stone  strike? 

4.  A  man  in  a  balloon  drops  a  piece  of  iron  and  finds  it  takes  10 
seconds  to  fall.     How  high  is  he? 

5.  If  the  building  is  64  feet  high,  how  long  would  it  take  a  ball  to 
fall  to  the  ground  if  it  should  blow  off  the  top? 

6.   How  far  will  a  freely  falling  body  fall  in  10  seconds? 


DYNAMICS  31 

The  quantity  of  motion  which  a  body  possesses  is  often 
expressed  as  momentum,  the  product  of  mass  times  velocity. 
The  momentum  of  a  locomotive  weighing  50  tons  moving 
with  a  velocity  of  20  feet  per  second  is  100,000  X  20  = 
2,000,000.  The  unit  of  momentum  has  never  been  named. 
In  comparing  momenta  the  same  units  of  mass  and  velocity 
must  be  used. 

We  have  found  that  motion  can  be  changed  in  quantity 
or  direction  only  by  the  action  of  force,  and  the  second  law 
of  motion  means  that  the  change  in  momentum  is  propor- 
tional to  the  force.  The  change  of  momentum  may  be  made 
the  means  of  measuring  the  force  applied.  The  unit  of  force 
depending  upon  this  principle  is  called  a  dynamic  unit.  The 
force  which  will  produce  unit  change  of  momentum  in  unit 
time  is  called  the  dyne  in  the  metric  system.  That  is,  the 
force  which  acting  for  one  second  on  a  mass  of  one  gram 
will  give  it  a  velocity  of  one  centimeter  per  second  is  one 
dyne.  The  gravitational  units  of  force,  the  gram  weight 
and  pound  weight,  that  is,  the  pull  of  gravity  for  a  mass 
of  one  gram  or  one  pound  have  already  become  familiar 
and  will  be  used  except  when  it  is  necessary  to  have  a  unit 
which  is  absolute  and  independent  of  all  variation.  If  a 
mass  of  one  gram  is  let  fall  freely  at  this  latitude  it  will 
receive  an  acceleration  of  980  centimeters  per  second  in 
each  second.  Since  a  dyne  is  a  force  which  will  accelerate 
a  gram  one  centimeter  per  second  every  second,  it  follows  that 
a  gram  is  equal  to  980  dynes  at  this  latitude.  Momentum 
equals  mass  times  velocity.  Change  of  momentum  or  force 
equals  mass  times  rate  of  change  of  velocity  or  /  =  ma  where 
force  is  expressed  in  dynamic  units.  To  change  this  to 
gravitational  units,  divide  by  g  and  we  have  /  =  ma/g. 

For  gravitational  units  the  author  prefers  to  use  /  =  - 

y 
where    w  =  weight    in    grams,    a  =  acceleration    in    centi- 


32  APPLIED    PHYSICS 

meters  per  second  per  second,  and  g  =  980;  or  w  =  weight  in 
pounds,  a  =  acceleration  in  feet  per  second  per  second,  and 
g  =  32.2  in  which  case  /  =  force  in  pounds.  Substituting 

v/'t  for  a,  we  have  /  =  -  -  or  w  =  weight  in  pounds,  v  — 

Qt 

velocity  in  feet  per  second,  t  =  time  in  seconds  the  force 
acts. 

Problems 

1.  What  force  (neglecting  friction)  will  be  required  to  start  a  rail- 
way coach  weighing  20  tons  and  give  it  an  increase  in  speed  of  £  foot 
per  second  every  second,  on  a  level  track.  If  friction  adds  10  pounds 
per  ton  weight  what  total  force  must  be  exerted? 

2.  What  force  must  be  exerted  on  a  100-pound  weight  to  give  it  an 
acceleration  of  32.2  feet  per  second  per  second? 

3.  If  a  boy  weighing  100  pounds  stands  on  the  platform  of  a  set 
of  scales  placed  in  a  passenger  elevator  what  will  his  apparent  weight 
be  while  the  elevator  is  getting  up  speed  at  the  rate  of  1^  feet  per  second 
each  second,  going  up?  going  down?  running  at  full  speed  without 
acceleration? 

4.  A  200-pound  man  stands  in  a  street  car  while  the  motorman 
sets  the  brakes  slowing  down  with  a  negative  acceleration  of  2  feet 
per  second  per  second.     What  is  the  force  required  to  keep  him  from 
being  thrown  forward?     What  force  to  brace  him  when  the  car  starts 
up  with  an  acceleration  of  1  foot  per  second  per  second? 

Gravity  is  the  pull  drawing  the  earth  and  any  other  body 
toward  each  other.  Gravitation  is  a  similar  attraction 
existing  between  all  bodies  at  a  distance.  Sir  Isaac  Newton 
watched  an  apple  fall  and  asked  himself  why.  If  a  one 
pound  ball  and  a  ten  pound  ball  were  tied  together  by  a 
stretched  rubber  band  and  then  left  free  to  move,  they 
would  both  move  toward  each  other  but  not  with  equal 
acceleration.  The  momentum  of  each  would  be  the  same 
but  the  larger  one  receives  only  one-tenth  as  great  a  velocity 
as  the  smaller  one.  The  same  condition  exists  when  an 
apple  falls  to  the  earth,  the  earth  also  falls  toward  the 
apple,  and  the  momentum  of  each  is  the  same.  If  your 


DYNAMICS  33 

mass  was  the  same  as  that  of  the  earth  and  you  should 
fall  down,  the  earth  would  fall  half-way  to  meet  you. 

What  the  force  of  gravitation  is  no  one  knows,  and  no 
one  knows  how  it  acts  between  bodies.  If  a  horse  is  to 
pull  a  load  it  is  necessary  to  hitch  him  to  it,  but  gravita- 
tion acts  through  a  great  distance  and  always  keeps  hold, 
yet  the  best  scientists  cannot  tell  us  how.  Newton  was 
able  to  state  some  of  the  laws  by  which  it  acts:  "  The 
attraction  between  two  bodies  varies  directly  as  the  product 
of  their  masses,  and  inversely  as  the  square  of  the  dis- 
tance between  their  centers  of  mass."  The  laws  of  weight 
are  derived  from  this: —  1.  The  weight  of  a  body  varies 
directly  as  its  mass  at  any  given  place.  2.  The  weight 
of  a  body  above  the  surface  of  the  earth  varies  inversely 
as  the  square  of  the  distance  between  its  center  of  gravity 
and  the  center  of  the  earth.  3.  Below  the  surface  the 
weight  varies  directly  as  the  distance  from  the  center  of 
the  earth. 

The  center  of  gravity  of  a  body  is  the  same  as  the  center 
of  mass.  It  is  the  point  at  which  the  whole  weight  of 
the  body  may  be  considered  as  centered.  If  a  brick  be 
resting  on  a  plain  surface  any  attempt  to  overturn  it  raises 
the  center  of  gravity  and  it  falls  back  to  place  again. 
This  is  called  stable  equilibrium.  A  pyramid  balanced 
on  its  apex  is  in  such  a  position  that  any  movement  will 
lower  its  center  of  gravity  and  it  will  tend  to  fall  farther. 
Such  a  body  is  in  unstable  equilibrium.  The  unsupported 
bicycle  standing  still  is  in  unstable  equilibrium.  If  a  ball 
lying  on  a  plain  surface  be  rolled  along,  its  center  of  gravity 
is  neither  raised  nor  lowered.  This  is  neutral  equilibrium. 

If  a  body  be  fastened  to  a  string  and  whirled  so  as  to 

give  it  a  circular  motion,  there  will  be  a  pull  on  the  string 

which  will  be  greater  or  less  as  the  velocity  is  increased 

or   diminished.     If  a  body  be   revolved   in  a  horizontal 

4 


34  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

plane  so  that  the  gravity  will  always  be  the  same,  we  may 
consider  that,  according  to  the  first  law  of  motion,  the 
body  tends  to  move  in  a  straight  line  and  would  so  move 
unless  some  force  causes  a  change  in  direction.  If  the 
string  be  cut,  the  force  which  pulled  the  body  out  of  a 
straight  line  would  be  removed  and  it  would  move  on  in 
a  straight  line  tangent  to  the  circle.  To  compute  the 

centrifugal  force  of  a  body  use  the  formula  /  =  — ;  /  = 

force,  w  =  weight,  v  =  velocity  per  second,  g  =  accelera- 
tion due  to  gravity,  r  =  radius  of  circle.  If  this  formula 
be  used  for  bodies  revolving  in  a  circle,  it  may  be  simpli- 
fied to  the  following:  /  =  0.00034  wrn2  where  /  =  force  in 
pounds,  w  =  weight  in  pounds,  r  =  radius  of  circle  in  feet, 
and  n  =  number  of  revolutions  per  minute.  In  comput- 
ing the  centrifugal  force  of  a  locomotive  rounding  a  curve 
the  first  form  is  usually  used.  For  computing  the  force 
tending  to  tear  apart  fly-wheels  and  pulleys,  the  latter  form 
is  used. 

Problems 

1.  What   centrifugal   force   must   be   exerted   when   a   locomotive 
weighing  100  tons  runs  at  40  miles  per  hour  around  a  curve  of  1000  feet 
radius? 

2.  In  the  above  problem  plot  the  centrifugal  force  as  a  horizontal 
line  and  the  weight  as  a  vertical  line  and  find  how  much  the  track 
must  be  banked  in  order  to  make  the  resultant  perpendicular  to  the 
track.     What  effect  on  this  parallelogram  would  result  if  the  weight 
of  the  locomotive  were  one  half  as  great? 

Energy  has  been  defined  as  the  ability  to  do  work.  We 
may  measure  energy  in  the  same  engineering  units  used 
for  work,  that  is,  foot-pounds.  A  foot-pound  of  energy  is 
the  ability  to  do  one  foot-pound  of  work. 

If  a  pound  weight  be  lifted  four  feet,  four  foot-pounds 
of  work  are  done  on  it  and  it  has  four  foot-pounds  of  possible 


DYNAMICS  35 

energy  called  potential  energy.  When  it  is  dropped  this 
potential  energy  is  transformed  to  energy  of  motion.  Just 
as  it  strikes  it  has  the  four  foot-pounds  of  energy  stored 
up  as  energy  of  motion.  This  is  called  Kinetic  Energy. 

Kinetic  energy  is  the  energy  of  any  body  due  to  its 
motion.  Such  is  the  energy  of  the  sledge,  the  trip 
hammer,  etc.  The  work  done  in  lifting  a  body  is  the 
weight  times  the  distance  E  =  WS.  E  =  foot-pounds  of 
work,  W  =  weight,  S  =  distance  weight  is  lifted.  If  a 
body  falls  this  potential  energy  is  all  transformed  to  kinetic 
energy  and  the  energy  in  foot-pounds  is  WS. 

But  S  =  \gt~  (Falling  bodies)   (1) 


Substitute    in    (1)   S  =  %g~  =  V2/2g   but   E  =  W  S   and 


t  =  V/g;  squaring  both  sides  of  the  equation  I2  —  V2  g2. 

and 

WV2 

substituting  the  value  of    S  we  have:    E  =  WS  =  —  ~  — 

foot-pounds. 

E  =  energy  in  foot-pounds,  W  =  weight  in  pounds, 
V  =  velocity  in  feet  per  second, 
g   =  acceleration  of  gravity 

It  makes  no  difference  whether  the  velocity  was  acquired 
as  a  falling  body  or  by  the  application  of  any  force,  the 
result  is  the  same.  We  may  use  this  formula  then  to  find 
the  foot-pounds  of  energy  possessed  by  a  base  ball,  cannon 
ball,  trip  hammer,  locomotive,  or  any  other  moving  body. 

Problems 

1.  The  Lake  Shore  Railroad  uses  a  pile  driver  with  a  1000-pound 
hammer  lifting  it  30  feet  and  letting  it  fall.  How  many  foot-pounds 
of  energy  has  it  when  it  strikes?  What  kind  of  energy?  Note  two 
ways  of  working  this  problem,  select  the  short  method,  and  tell  how  to 
work  it  the  other  method. 


36  APPLIED    PHYSICS 

2.  If  the  pile  is  driven  3  feet  at  a  blow,  what  is  the  force  of  the  blow? 
If  driven  2  feet?     1  foot?     6  inches?     3  inches?     2  inches?     (The  force 
of  the  blow  multiplied  by  the  distance  the  resistance  is  moved  gives 
the  foot-pounds  of  work  done  and  this  must  equal  the  energy  expended. 
If  a  hammer  strikes  a  piece  of  iron  will  the  force  of  the  blow  be  the 
same  with  the  iron  on  an  anvil  as  it  would  be  with  the  iron  on  a  feather 
pillow?) 

3.  What  is  the  energy  of  a  200-pound  trip  hammer  moving  20  feet 
per  second? 

4.  What  is  the  energy  of  a  50-ton  locomotive  moving  20  feet  per 
second?     Moving  40  feet  per  second?     What  is  the  ratio  of  the  last 
two  results?     Why  is  this? 

5.  Why  does  an  automobile  running  into  a  stone  wall  have  nine 
times  as  much  energy  to  use  in  smashing  itself  if  it  is  running  at  sixty 
miles  per  hour  as  when  running  20  miles  per  hour? 

If  a  heavy  block,  placed  on  a  smooth  table,  be  pulled 
along  on  the  surface  by  a  spring  balance,  it  will  be  found 
that  some  force  must  be  exerted  to  keep  it  moving.  This 
is  used  in  overcoming  friction.  If  the  block  weighs  ten 
pounds  and  has  a  flat  face  with  100  square  inches  area 
and  an  edge  with  only  10  square  inches  surface,  the  force 
to  overcome  friction  is  found  to  be  the  same  whether  the 
block  is  on  the  edge  or  on  the  face.  This  is  approximately 
summed  up  by  the  statement  that  the  friction  depends 
upon  the  pressure  and  is  independent  of  the  size  of  the 
surface.  It  will  vary  with  the  nature  of  the  substance  and 
the  nature  of  the  surface.  The  friction  is  less  when  the 
body  is  in  motion  than  when  it  is  at  rest.  If  the  pressure 
between  the  two  bodies  is  10  pounds  and  one  pound  pull  is 
required  to  keep  one  of  them  sliding  on  the  other  at  a  uni- 
form speed,  the  coefficient  of  friction  is  one  tenth.  The 
force  required  to  keep  a  body  moving  at  a  uniform  velocity 
divided  by  the  pressure  is  the  coefficient  of  friction.  The 
coefficient  of  friction  of  bronze  on  bronze,  or  bronze  on  cast 
iron  when  dry  is  about  0.2.  The  coefficient  of  friction  for 
the  same  surface  well  lubricated  is  from  0.05  to  0.07. 


DYNAMICS  37 

Problems 

1.  What  is  inertia? 

2.  What  are  Newton's  laws  of  motion? 

3.  If  two  forces  act  on  a  body  at  a  certain  point  at  one  time,  what 
is  the  resultant  and  how  may  it  be  found? 

4.  Describe,  illustrate,  and  give  a  unit  of  each  of  the  following: 
work,  power,  energy,  momentum,  force. 

5.  If  a  force  of  500  pounds  is  pulling  directly  east  on  a  body  and  a 
second  force  of  900  pounds  is  pulling  south  on  the  same  body,  what  is 
the  resultant  force? 

6.  If  a  belt  running  over  a  pulley  has  a  tension  downward  of  750 
pounds,  and  the  other  side  of  the  belt,  running  from  the  pulleys  at  an 
angle  of  45  degrees  to  the  vertical,  has  a  tension  of  250  .pounds,  find 
the  direction  and  magnitude  of  the  resultant  pull  on  the  hanger.     If 
this  belt  is  transmitting  20  horse-power,  what  speed  must  it  have? 

7.  If  a  boat  be  rowed  across  a  river  at  right  angles  to  the  current 
at  4  miles  per  hour,  and  the  current  carry  it  down  at  the  rate  of  2 
miles  per  hour,  find  the  actual  velocity  and  direction. 

8.  What  horse-power  is  required  to  raise  a  weight  of  99,000  pounds 
a  height  of  40  feet  in  one  half  hour? 

9.  A  cross  head  weighing  500  pounds,  having  bronze  shoes,  slides 
on  a  well-lubricated  cast-iron  surface.     What  is  the  total  friction? 

10.  A  locomotive  weighing  40  tons  has  to  exert  a  force  of  ten  pounds 
per  ton  in  overcoming  friction  when  it  is  in  motion.     What  total  force 
must  the  locomotive  exert  to  increase  its  speed  2  feet  per  second  in 
one  second?     What  will  be  the  momentum  of  this  locomotive  when 
it  is  running  60  miles  per  hour?     What  will  be  the  centrigufal  force 
if  it  runs  at  the  above  speed  around  a  curve  with  a  radius  of  2000  feet? 

11.  If  the  rim  of  a  fly-wheel  weighs  500  pounds,  and  has  a  diameter 
to  the  center  of  the  rim  of  8  feet,  how  large  is  the  force  tending  to  tear 
it  apart  when  revolving  20  times  per  minute? 

12.  If  a  body  will  fall  from  the  top  of  a  building  in  2  seconds,  how 
high  is  the  building  in  feet  and  in  meters? 

13.  At  one  of  the  amusement  parks,  on  a  certain  railroad,  there 
is  a  stretch  of  track  60  feet  long  with  a  drop  of  20  feet.     If  the  car 
runs  without  friction  down  this  incline,  starting  from  rest,  what  velocity 
will  it  have?     how  many  miles  per  hour  is  this?     If  it  drops  vertically 
20  feet,  what  velocity  will  it  attain? 


38 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


If  a  heavy  weight   be  suspended  by  a  light   cord  as 
shown  in    Fig.    29   and   pulled  to  one  side  of  its  lower 

point  as  in  that  figure, 
the  forces  of  gravity 
and  the  string  will  re- 
sult in  the  force  caus- 
ing the  weight  to  move 
as  shown;  a  is  a  line 
to  represent  the  force 
of  gravity,  B  the  pull 
of  the  string,  and  r  the 
resultant  which  is  un- 
balanced and  therefore 
produces  motion.  This 
was  known  before  the 
time  of  Galileo,  but  it 
remained  for  that  great 
observer  to  find  that 
a  pendulum  always  took  approximately  the  same  time 
for  a  swing,  whether  that  swing  was  long  or  short,  if  the 
pendulum  remained  the  same  length.  Galileo,  sitting  in  a 
cathedral  when  the  chandelier  was  set  swinging,  observed 
that  when  almost  at  rest,  one  swing  or  vibration  took  the 
same  time  that  one  vibration  took  when  making  a  long 
swing.  The  distance  or  length  from  point  of  rest  to  one. 
end  of  the  swing  is  the  amplitude.  The  amplitude  is  the 
length  of  the  swing  from  the  position  of  rest  (see  AB  in 
the  figure).  The  swing  from  one  point  back  to  the  same 
point  going  in  the  same  direction  is  a  double  vibration. 
The  swing  from  one  side  to  the  other  is  a  single  vibration 
and  is  one-half  a  double  vibration.  The  time  of  the  pen- 
dulum is  the  time  of  a  single  vibration.  If  the  time  is  one 
second,  it  is  called  a  seconds  pendulum.  The  laws  of  the 
pendulum  are: 


FIG.  29. 


DYNAMICS  39 

1.  The  time  of  the  pendulum  is  very  nearly  independent 
of  its  amplitude,  if  the  amplitude  is  only  a  small  part  of 
the  arc  of  a  circle. 

2.  The  time  of  a  pendulum  is  proportional  to  the  square 
root  of  its  length. 

3.  The  time  of  a  pendulum  is  inversely  proportional  to 
the  square  root  of  the  acceleration  due  to  gravity. 

4.  The  time  of  a  pendulum  is  independent  of  its  mass. 

These  laws  are  expressed  in  the  formula  t  =  "A/-; 

t  =  time;   /  =  length;   g  =  acceleration  due  to  gravity. 

Solve  this  formula  for  g  in  terms  of  the  other  values. 
The  chief  use  of  the  pendulum  is  to  measure  time. 

Before  the  use  of  the  pendulum  became  general  the  sun- 
dial and  the  sand  hour-glass  were  used.  Examine  the 
escapement  of  a  clock  and  see  how  the  pendulum  is  applied. 
Substitute  in  the  formula  t  =  1  and  find  the  length  of  the 
seconds  pendulum.  Compare  this  with  the  master-clock 
in  the  office. 


CHAPTER   III 
MECHANICS   OF   FLUIDS 

THE  most  commonly  accepted  theory,  that  all  matter 
is  made  up  of  molecules,  has  been  mentioned  in  Chapter  I. 
It  is  supposed  that  the  spaces  between  the  molecules  are 
large  compared  to  the  size  of  the  molecules,  and  that  the 
particles  themselves  are  therefore  not  in  contact  but  are 
continually  in  motion  and  bounce  against  one  another. 
If  the  molecules  are  fixed  so  that  they  vibrate  in  one 
place,  the  body  will  not  change  its  form  and  is  a  solid. 
A  solid  is  a  body  which  retains  a  definite  form  and  volume. 

In  some  bodies  the  molecules  are  supposed  to  be  free  to 
move  about  from  place  to  place  and,  as  they  strike  one 
another  and  rebound,  they  move  about  from  place  to  place. 
The  body  will  not  hold  a  definite  form  but  will  flow  and 
take  the  shape  of  the  containing  vessel.  Such  a  body  is 
a  liquid.  A  liquid  is  a  body  which  takes  the  shape  of  the 
containing  vessel  but  maintains  a  definite  volume.  At 
ordinary  temperatures  water  and  mercury  are  examples 
of  liquids.  In  both  of  these  cases  the  cohesion  between 
the  molecules  holds  them  together  so  that  they  keep  a 
fixed  volume.  In  some  bodies  the  molecules  repel  with  a 
force  greater  than  that  of  cohesion  and  the  particles  get 
as  far  apart  as  possible.  Such  a  body  will  have  no  definite 
fixed  volume  but  will  expand  until  it  is  distributed  through- 
out, or  fills  the  containing  vessel.  Such  a  body  is  gas. 
Hydrogen,  oxygen,  and  air  are  examples. 

The  three  states  of  matter  are  solid,  liquid,  and  gaseous. 
The  last  two  are  often  combined  and  called  fluid.  The 
characteristic  of  a  fluid  is  the  ease  with  which  its  parts 

40 


MECHANICS    OF    FLUIDS 


41 


slide  over  each  other  and  it  changes  its  shape,  namely,  its 
mobility,  If  at  a  certain  temperature  a  body  be  part 
liquid  and  part  gaseous,  the  latter  part  is  not  considered  a 
gas  but  is  called  vapor.  Many  substances  may  exist  in 
all  three  states  of  matter  depending  upon  the  condition  of 
temperature.  Water  may  be  put  in  an  ice  box  in  the  form 
of  a  solid.  At  ordinary  temperatures  it  is  a  liquid  while 
at  higher  temperatures  it  becomes  steam,  an  invisible  gas. 
At  ordinary  temperatures  water  exposed  in  an  open  vessel 
will  slowly  evaporate.  It  then  takes  the  form  of  vapor. 

A  gas  may  be  compressed.  When  a  pneumatic  tire  is 
filled,  several  cubic  feet  of  air  may  be  compressed  to  one 
cubic  foot.  If  the  pressure  is  removed  it  will  expand 
again.  Liquids  are  almost  incompressible,  even  under 
enormous  pressures,  and  on  the  other  hand  when  the  pres- 
sure is  removed  they  do  not  expand.  Aside  from  this 
difference,  liquids  and  gases  may  be  treated  much  alike. 
This  chapter  is  to  present  the  mechanics  of  fluids. 

In  Fig.  30,  suppose  a  and  b  are   two  cylinders  of  the 
same  size,  one  fitted  by  a  block  of  wood  while  the  other  is 
filled  with  water.     Each  is 
fitted   with  a  piston,   and 
suppose  in   each   case  the 
piston  has  an   area  of  50 
square     inches.       Neglect 
the  weight  of  piston,  wood, 
water,  etc.,  in   each    case, 
and  suppose  a  force  of  500 
pounds  is  applied  to  each 
piston.     This  would  be  a 

pressure  of  10  pounds  to 

, ,  .1         j  •     j.u       In  b  pressure  on  the  bottom  only. 

the  square  inch  and  in  the    In  a  ^ressure  on  the  sides  also. 

case  of  b  would   be  trans- 
mitted to  the  end-  of  the  cylinder  and  there  exert  a  pressure 


FIG.  30. 


42 


APPLIED   PHYSICS 


equal  to  10  pounds  per  square  inch.  In  a  there  would  be 
the  same  pressure  of  10  pounds  per  square  inch  on  the  bot- 
tom of  the  cylinder,  but  since  the  molecules  are  free  to  move 
and  slide  over  each  other,  they  will  press  out  on  the  sides 
of  the  cylinder  and  the  pressure  of  10  pounds  per  square 
inch  will  also  be  transmitted  to  the  sides.  If  a  pipe  be 
tapped  into  the  sides  of  a  and  a  pressure  gauge  put  on,  it 
will  be  found  that,  neglecting,  the  weight  of  the  water, 
the  pressure  is  the  same  at  every  inch  of  surface. 

Every  boy  knows  that  the  pressure  applied  to  the  water 
at  a  pumping  station  is  transmitted  through  the  pipes 
which  make  many  turns  and  presses  outward  at  any 
point.  If  a  hole  is  made  in  the  water  pipe  at  any  point, 
pressure  will  be  required  to  keep  the  water  in.  Pascal 
summed  this  up  in  the  following  law:  "  The  pressure 
per  unit  area  exerted  anywhere  on  a  confined  liquid  is 
transmitted  undiminished  in  all  directions  and  acts  with 
the  same  force  on  all  surfaces  at  right  angles  to  those 
surfaces."  This  principle  is  made  use  of  in  the  hydraulic 
press. 

In  Fig.  31,  a  is  a  piston  having  a  cross  section  of  1 
square  inch.  When  this  is  raised  valve  /  opens  and 

water  flows  in  to  fill  its 
place.  As  a  is  pressed 
down,  valve  /  closes  and 
valve  c  opens  allowing 
the  water  to  flow  into  the 
large  cylinder,  and  if  a 
is  pressed  down  with  a 
force  of  one  pound,  this 
pressure  will  be  transmit- 
ted to  every  square  inch 


ILb. 


FIG.  31. 


The  pressure  on  the  pistons  is  pro-    of   area   jn  tne  large  pis. 
portional  to  the  area  or  in  proportion 
to  the  square  of  the  diameter.  ton    6.       li    this    has     an 


MECHANICS    OF    FLUIDS 


43 


area  of  100  square  inches  the  total  pressure  will  be  100 
pounds. 

The  small  piston  is  usually  worked  by  a  lever  and 
may  have  a  pressure  of  500  pounds  per  square  inch  in 
which  case  the  large  piston  would  receive  a  pressure  of 
500  pounds  per  square  inch  or  a  total  force  of  50,000 
pounds. 

It  is  evident  that  the  lower  part  of  a  fluid  must  support 
the  portions  of  the  fluid  that  rest  upon  it.  The  weight 
due  to  gravity  must  cause  pressure  in  the  fluid.  This  pres- 
sure is  transmitted  in  all  directions.  Suppose  a  and  6, 
Fig.  32,  are  two  cylinders  of  the  same  size  at  the  bottom, 
connected  by  pipe  c.  If 
water  is  poured  in  until 
both  are  filled  to  near  the 
top  the  water  will  stand 
at  the  same  level  in  both. 
The  fluid  is  at  rest  and 
the  pressure  at  c  is  the 
same  from  each  side  or 
there  would  be  a  flow  of 
water.  If  we  consider  a 
small  particle  of  water  at 
/,  the  pressure  must  be 


FIG.  32. 


the  same  in  opposite  directions  or  the  particle  would 
move  in  the  direction  of  the  unbalanced  force.  At  d, 
the  water  is  exerting  a  downward  pressure  in  the  pipe 
e,  and  at  the  foot  of  the  pipe  the  pressure  is  transmitted 
in  all  directions  and  presses  up  on  the  cylinder  head  the 
same  amount  that  it  presses  up  to  support  the  water  at 
the  same  level  at  /  in  a. 

As  the  pressure  is  balanced  at  c,  the  pressure  per  square 
inch  is  the  same  in  each  cylinder  and  the  pressure  on 
the  bottom  of  a  is  the  same  as  the  pressure  of  b.  In  a 


44  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

fluid  at  rest,  the  pressure  at  any  point  is  independent  of 
the  size  and  shape  of  the  containing  vessel  but  depends  upon 
the  depth  of  the  fluid  only.  A  dam  10  feet  high  and  50 
feet  long  holding  back  the  Atlantic  ocean  has  the  same 
pressure  to  withstand  as  a  dam  the  same  size  forming 
part  of  the  side  of  a  salt  water  canal.  If  you  suppose 
that  the  pressure  depends  upon  the  quantity  of  water 
present,  rather  than  the  depth,  go  home  and  watch  the 
tea  kettle  boil  and  wonder  why  the  great  weight  of  water 
in  the  body  of  the  kettle  does  not  more  than  balance  the 
small  quantity  in  the  spout  and  make  it  all  run  out. 

In  Fig.  32,  a  and  b  each  have  an  area  of  one  square 
foot,  the  total  pressure  is  the  same.  The  pressure  is  equal 
to  the  weight  of  the  water  in  b.  To  find  the  force  on 
a  surface,  multiply  together  the  area  of  the  surface,  its 
depth,  and  the  weight  of  unit  volume  of  the  liquid.  A 
cubic  foot  of  water  weighs  62J  pounds.  A  cubic  centi- 
meter weighs  1  gram. 

If  in  Fig.  32  a  has  an  area  of  one  square  foot  and 
the  depth  is  10  feet,  what  is  the  force  on  a  when  the 
vessel  is  filled  with  water?  What  is  the  pressure  per 
square  inch?  Find  the  same  for  b.  Since  there  is  so  much 
more  water  pressing  on  b  from  where  does  the  extra 
force  on  a  come?  If  a  hole  were  drilled  in  d,  would  the 
water  run  out?  Why?  Draw  a  diagram  of  a  lawn  hose 
attached  to  the  bottom  of  a  water-tower  to  show  that 
pressure  due  to  weight  of  fluid  may  be  in  any  direction. 

In  a  high-level  water  storage  tank,  suppose  the  level  of 
the  water  to  be  60  feet  above  the  level  of  the  first  floor  of 
your  school  building  and  a  one-inch  pipe  to  run  from  the 
storage  tank  to  the  level  leading  into  a  closed  steel  tank 
heater.  What  would  be  the  pressure  per  square  inch? 
Would  it  be  any  different  if  the  storage  tank  extended 
down  full  size  to  the  school  level?  A  certain  little  town  in 


MECHANICS   OF 'FLUIDS  45 

Michigan  which  had  no  water-works  put  in  a  town  pump 
and  put  up  a  large  tank,  such  as  the  railroads  use,  on 
posts  the  height  of  the  second  floor.  A  two-inch  pipe 
ran  from  this  to  the  street  level  and  a  hydrant  was  put  in. 
They  expected  to  attach  a  hose  to  the  hydrant  and  the 
"great  weight  of  water"  in  the  tank  would  throw  a  stream 
over  any  three-story  building  in  town.  Did  it  work? 

The  plumber  uses  the  approximate  rule  that  there  is  a 
pressure  of  one  pound  per  square  inch  for  every  two  feet 
in  depth  of  water.  What  is  the  error  of  this  rule  at  a 
depth  of  34  feet  below  the  surface?  A  steam  boiler  must 
be  tested  to  a  pressure  higher  than  the  steam  pressure  it 
is  to  carry.  If  a  new  boiler  is  to  be  tested  to  a  pressure  of 
500  pounds,  would  it  be  safe  to  fire  up  and  run  the  steam 
pressure  to  500  pounds?  It  is  filled  full  of  water  and  then 
a  small  force  pump  is  attached  and  the  pressure  of  500 
pounds  per  square  inch  is  exerted  in  the  force  pump 
cylinder.  What  pressure  is  exerted  in  the  boiler?  Why? 
If  it  breaks,  would  there  be  an  explosion?  Why? 

If  a  fish  were  34  feet  below  the  surface  of  the  water, 
what  pressure  per  square  inch  would  he  have  to  sustain? 
Why  does  this  not  crush  him?  Would  the  pressure  vary 
if  the  fluid  had  less  weight  per  cubic  foot  or  more  weight 
per  cubic  foot?  Air  is  a  fluid  much  lighter  per  cubic  foot 
than  water.  The  enormous  quantity  of  air  above  the 
surface  of  the  earth  must  exert  a  considerable  pressure 
upon  the  earth.  Did  you  ever  notice  this  pressure?  From 
the  time  of  Adam  until  the  time  of  Torricelli,  men  paid 
little  attention  to  the  pressure  of  the  air.  Before  this 
time  it  had  been  observed  that  when  a  tube  was  placed 
with  one  end  in  water,  as  in  Fig.  33,  and  the  piston  with- 
drawn, the  water  would  follow  it.  It  was  also  found  that 
the  water  would  follow  about  34  feet  and  could  not  be 
raised  any  farther.  Mercury  is  13.6  times  heavier  than 


46 


APPLIED   PHYSICS 


water,   and  when  mercury  replaced  the  water  it  would 
rise  to  a  height  of  only  29.9  inches. 

Torricelli,  in  1643,  filled  a  glass  tube  more  than  30  inches 
long  with  mercury.  He  then  inverted  it  in  a  cup  of  mercury, 
as  in  Fig.  34.  The  mercury  fell  from 
the  end  of  the  tube  and  stood  about 
29.5  inches  above  that  in  the  cup.  He 
believed  the  mercury  in  the  tube  pressed 
down  enough  to  equal  the  pressure  of 
the  air  on  the  same  area  in  the  cup.  To 
prove  this  he  carried  the  tube  up  on  a 
mountain  and  found  the  mercury  in  the 
tube  settled  down  still  lower.  ^ 
The  space  above  the  mercury 
containing  nothing  but  a  little 
mercury  vapor  is  called  a  Tor- 
ricellian vacuum.  The  pres- 
sure on  the  mercury  surface 
in  the  cup  is  due  to  the  weight 
of  the  air  above  it  just  as  the 
pressure  on  the  boy  at  the 
bottom  of  the  heap  in  a  foot 
ball  game  is  due  to  the  weight 
of  the  boys  on  top. 

There  is  a  popular  impres- 
sion that  mercury  rises  in  the 
barometer  tube,  or  water  un- 
der the  piston,  etc,  because  of 
suction.  What  is  incorrectly  called  suction  is 
due  entirely  to  pressure  outside.  A  simple  dem- 
onstration of  this  is  shown  in  Fig.  35.  A  ba- 
rometer tube,  or  Torricellian  tube,  is  placed  inside 
a  long  air-tight  guinea  and  feather  tube.  The 
mercury  stands  at  about  29  inches.  If  this  is  placed  on 


FIG.  33. 


FIG.  34. 


MECHANICS    OF    FLUIDS 


47 


the  air  pump  and  part  of  the  air  exhausted 
the  mercury  in  the  tube  falls.  This  shows 
that  pressure  on  the 
mercury  in  the  open 
test  tube,  not  suction, 
held  the  column  of 
mercury  up.  If  the  air 
pump  is  a  good  one, 
the  mercury  will  fall  to 
almost  the  same  level 
as  that  in  the  test 
tube. 

The  reading  of  a 
barometer  depends  up- 
on the  weight  of  the 
mercury  and  upon  the 
pressure  of  the  air.  If 
the  temperature  of 
mercury  is  changed  its 
density  changes,  hence 
to  compare  readings  in 
different  places  the 
mercury  must  be  at 
the  same  temperature. 
For  convenience  the 
freezing  point  0°C  is 
taken  as  normal  tem- 
perature. If  the  mer- 
cury is  warmer  than 
this,  it  has  expanded 
FIG.  36.  —  Standard  and  a  small  quantity 
must  be  subtracted. 

The  pressure  of  the  air  depends  upon  the 
layers    of   air   above   the  instrument,   so   if 


FIG.  35. 

When  air  is 
removed  from 
the  large  tube 
the  mercury 
in  the  Torri- 
cellian  tube 
falls,  showing 
that  the  mer- 
cury is  sup- 
ported by 
pressure  with- 
out,  not  by 
"suction." 


48  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

the  elevation  is  changed,  the  pressure  is  changed.  Sea- 
level  is  taken  as  standard  level,  hence  if  the  instrument 
is  above  sea-level  a  small  quantity  must  be  added  to  the 
reading.  These  are  taken  from  tables  and  the  correct 
reading  is  said  to  be  reduced  to  sea-level.  When  readings 
taken  in  different  places  are  compared,  it  is  found  that 
they  differ.  A  line  drawn  on  a  map  through  places  of 
equal  pressure  is  called  an  isobaric  line  or  an  isobar.  A 
region  of  low-pressure  is  called  a  low  or  cyclonic  area. 
The  air  flows  in  from  all  directions  toward  such  an  area, 
forming  a  whirlpool  of  air.  These  cyclonic  areas  in  the 
United  States  whirl  counterclockwise.  They  are  con- 
tinually crossing  the  country  from  the  west,  following 
well  denned  paths,  and  the  weather  forecaster  is  able  to 
predict  the  weather  conditions  for  about  24  hours  ahead, 
because  of  his  knowledge  of  the  action  of  these  lows.  The 
nearest  United  States  weather  bureau  will  furnish  any 
school  with  weather  maps.  A  series  of  them  should  be 
studied. 

Problems 

1.  What  is  the  force  on  the  bottom  of  a  vertical  tank  34  feet 
deep  and  one  foot  square,  filled  with  water?     What  is  the  pressure 
on  each  square  inch  of  the  bottom?     Mercury  is  13.6  times  as  heavy 
as  water,  how  deep  must  a  tank  of  mercury  be  to  give  the  same  pres- 
sure per  square  inch?     What  is  the  pressure  in  pounds  per  square  inch 
when  the  barometer  stands  30  inches? 

2.  In  the  condensing  engine  the  degree  of  vacuum  in  the  condens- 
ing chamber  is  expressed  in  pounds  below  atmosphere  or  in  inches 
of  mercury  below  atmosphere.     On  a  day  when  the  barometer  stands 
at  30  inches  and  the  condensing  chamber  is  reduced  to  ^  the  pressure 
of  the  atmosphere  the  engineer  calls  it  20  inches  of  vacuum  or  8.9 
pounds  vacuum.     The  pressure  in  the  chamber  would  then  be  10  inches 
or  about  4.9  pounds  per  square  inch.     When  the  barometer  stands 
at  29  inches  what  is  the  pressure  inside  in  inches  and  the  vacuum  in 
pounds  when  the  vacuum  gauge  reads   10  inches?    14  5  inches?   26 
inches?  34  inches?     Is  the  last  one  possible?     Why? 


MECHANICS    OF   FLUIDS 


49 


In  Fig.  37  is  shown  a  lift  pump,  sometimes  called  a 
suction  pump.  The  piston  (6)  is  lifted  by  means  of  the 
pump  handle  and  this  removes  the  air  pressure  in  the 
cylinder  above  the  valve  (a).  The  pressure  below  (a) 
raises  that  valve  and  the  water  runs  into  the  cylinder. 
Notice  that  suction  can  never  raise  water.  If  the  air 
pressure  on  the  water  outside  of  the  pump  were  removed, 
the  water  would  not  flow  through  (a).  Piston  (b)  is 


FIG.  38. 


stopped  and  valve  (a)  closes,  and  as  (b)  is  pushed  down 
the  water  flows  through  b.  The  next  stroke  lifts  it  out 
of  the  cylinder.  If  suction  pulled  the  water  up,  then  there 
would  l)e  no  limit  to  the  height  at  which  the  cylinder 
could  be  placed  above  the  water  in  the  well.  When  the 
water  barometer  stands  at  34  feet,  the  cylinder  must  be 
placed  a  little  lower  than  that,  as  the  valves  cannot  be 
made  to  work  perfectly  air-tight.  Could  a  city  pumping 
station  be  located  more  than  34  feet  above  the  level  of 
5 


50 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


a  lake  from  which  the  water  is  drawn?  Why?  Air  has  no 
tenacity  such  as  wire  would  have.  The  air  is  removed  from 
many  buildings  by  so-called  "  suction  fans."  If  the  air  has 
no  tenacity,  why  does  the  air  rush  into  the  stacks  leading 
from  a  room  to  the  fan  when  the  fan  is  started.  Suppose  you 
were  to  pump  mercury  out  of  a  well,  how  high  could  you 
place  a  cylinder  above  the  mercury  and  still  have  it  work? 

The  force  pump  in  Fig.  38  fills  its  cylinder  in  the  same 
way  but  the  top  of  the  cylinder  is  closed  and  packed  at  (t), 
and  on  the  up  stroke  the  water  is  forced  into  the  air  chamber 
(/).  The  air  is  compressed  and  its  elastic  tension  forces 
the  water  out  through  the  pipe  in  a  steady  flow. 

In  Fig.  39,  the  siphon  is  shown.     So  long  as  the  siphon 
is  empty  no  water  will  flow  from  the  vessel  (6) .     If  the 
^_-_^=^_-_-__- -_- ^-^  -_===^  tube  is  filled  with  water 

it  is  evident  that  the  air 
pressure  is  the  same  at 
(6)  and  at  (d) ,  but  on  the 
right  between  (c)  and  (d) 
the  water  column  (a)  is 
pressing  down  and  its 
pressure  is  subtracted 
from  that  of  the  air.  On 
the  left,  the  water  col- 
umn (h)  is  pressing  down 
and  its  pressure  is  sub- 
tracted from  that  of  the 
air.  The  result  is  un- 
equal at  (c);  there  is  an 
unbalanced  pressure 
toward  the  longer  column 
FIG.  39.  which  pushes  the  water 

through     the    tube.      If 
(c)  were  more  than  34  feet  above  (6),  the  siphon  would 


MECHANICS    OF    FLUIDS  51 

not  work,  as  the  air  pressure  would  not  lift  the  water  to 
the  bend  in  the  tube. 

In  gases  the  molecules  are  supposed  to  be  far  apart 
and  to  move  with  great  velocity.  Each  moves  in  a  straight 
line  until  it  collides  with  another  molecule  or  with  the 
wall  of  the  containing  vessel,  when  it  rebounds  in  another 
direction.  The  path  from  one  collision  to  another  is  the 
Free  Path,  and  its  length  will  depend  upon  the  number  of 
molecules  in  a  given  space  and  their  velocity.  It  is  sup- 
posed that  the  velocity  of  the  hydrogen  molecule,  under 
normal  pressure  and  temperature  (N.T.P.)  conditions,  is 
about  one  mile  per  second.  At  the  same  temperature  the 
oxygen  molecule  has  only  one  fourth  as  great  a  velocity, 
but  as  its  mass  is  16  times  as  great  it  has  the  same  kinetic 
energy.  If  a  gas  is  confined  in  a  cylinder  with  an  air- 
tight piston  working  freely  on  one  end,  the  molecules 
will  continually  strike  this  and  rebound.  There  will  be 
a  pressure  exerted  against  the  piston.  If  the  gas  is  com- 
pressed more  molecules  will  strike  the  piston  and  the 
pressure  is  increased.  This  force,  which  the  gas  exerts 
in  trying  to  expand,  is  its  elastic  tension.  It  is  supposed 
that  the  number  of  molecules  is  very  great  and  that  their 
bombardment  is  continuous.  When  a  cannon  ball  is 
forced  out  of  a  gun  by  the  pressure  of  the  expanding  gases 
behind  it,  the  molecules  in  bounding  and  rebounding  must 
have  an  enormous  velocity. 

The  pupils  in  any  room  are  continually  breathing  out 
C02  into  the  room.  This  gas  is  heavier  than  air.  If  it 
were  inert  and  the  molecules  not  moving,  it  would  all 
settle  to  the  bottom  of  the  room  and  remain  as  a  distinct 
layer.  Illuminating  gas  being  lighter  than  air  would 
rise  to  the  top  of  the  room,  and  there  would  be  a  layer 
of  carbondioxide  at  the  bottom,  gas  at  the  top,  and  air 
between.  But  the  molecules  of  each  gas  are  moving  with 


52  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

great  velocity,  and  when  they  come  to  the  edge  of  the  gas 
many  of  them  are  carried  on  through  and  soon  the  gases 
are  completely  and  uniformly  mixed.  This  process  is  called 
diffusion.  The  lighter  gases  have  the  higher  velocities, 
and  hence  diffuse  more  rapidly  than  the  heavier  ones. 
It  is  by  the  rate  of  diffusion  that  the  molecular  velocity 
is  measured. 

The  molecule  of  oxygen  weighs  sixteen  times  that  of 
hydrogen,  and  it  is  found  that  a  cubic  foot  of  oxygen  weighs 
sixteen  times  as  much  as  a  cubic  foot  of  hydrogen.  This' 
fact  is  sometimes  used  to  explain  the  low  barometer  when 
the  air  contains  a  large  amount  of  water  vapor.  The 
molecular  weight  of  oxygen  is  32;  that  of  nitrogen  is  28. 
Water  (H20)  has  a  molecular  weight  of  only  18.  If  a 
cubic  foot  of  gas  at  a  given  temperature  and  pressure 
always  contains  the  same  number  of  molecules,  it  is  evident 
that  if  some  of  these  are  replaced  by  lighter  ones  the  gas 
will  not  weigh  so  much  per  cubic  foot.  The  effect  will 
be  the  same  as  removing  some  of  the  heavy  players  from 
a  football  team  and  replacing  them  by  lighter  ones.  The 
combined  weight  of  the  team  will  be  less.  When  mole- 
cules of  water  vapor  replace  some  of  the  oxygen  and  nitro- 
gen, the  pressure  of  the  air  will  be  less  and  the  barometer 
will  stand  lower. 

When  solids  go  into  the  solution  they  disappear  as 
visible  solids.  The  molecules  have  become  separated  and 
move  about  in  the  solution  much  as  gas  molecules  move 
about.  Two  solutions  placed  in  contact  will  mingle  by 
diffusion,  as  gases  do.  If  two  solutions  are  separated  by 
membranes,  it  is  found  that  the  molecules  will  pass  through 
and  the  solution  will  mix.  This  is  osmosis.  Two  solu- 
tions will  pass  through  at  different  rates.  Many  of  the 
membranes  of  the  body  allow  dissolved  substances  to 
pass  through  by  osmosis.  These  are  called  semi-permeable 


MECHANICS    OF    FLUIDS  53 

membranes.  The  semi-permeable  membranes  of  the  plant 
cells  at  the  tips  of  roots  allow  water  to  pass  into  the  plant 
and  thus  increase  the  pressure,  helping  the  sap  to  rise  to 
the  top  of  the  trees.  Such  pressure  is  osmotic  pressure. 

The  molecular  theory  of  gases  would  lead  us  to  suppose 
that  if  pressure  were  applied  to  a  gas  the  molecules  would 
be  crowded  together  and  in  a  given  volume  there  would 
be  more  molecules.  If  the  pressure  on  a  given  quantity 
of  gas  were  doubled,  the  gas  would  be  compressed  to  one 
half  its  first  volume  and  there  would  be  twice  as  many 
molecules  striking  the  same  area  in  the  containing  vessel 
and  the  elastic  tension  would  be  doubled.  This  fact  was 
discovered  and  experimentally  proved  by  Robert  Boyle 
and  stated  as  Boyle's  Law:  "  At  constant  temperature 
the  volume  of  a  given  quantity  of  gas  is  inversely  propor- 
tional to  the  pressure  upon  it."  If  a  cubic  foot  of  air  at 
atmospheric  pressure  is  pumped  into  a  bicycle  tire  so  that 
the  pressure  becomes  two  atmospheres,  that  is,  15  pounds 
more  than  the  atmosphere,  the  volume  will  be  one-half  a 
cubic  foot. 

Pressure  gauges  are  made  to  read  either  in  absolute 
pressure  or  in  pounds  pressure  above  that  of  the  atmos- 
phere. Absolute  pressure  is  the  pressure  above  zero. 
Steam  pressure  is  usually  given  as  the  number  of  pounds 
above  the  atmospheric  pressure.  In  the  condensing  engine 
a  chamber  is  used  in  which  the  pressure-  is  less  than  one 
atmosphere.  Such  a  partial  vacuum  is  measured  by  a 
vacuum  gauge.  The  pressure  of  the  atmosphere  is  about 
29  inches  of  mercury.  The  vacuum  gauge  is  so  arranged 
that  it  reads,  in  inches  of  mercury,  or  in  pounds  the 
amount  the  pressure  has  been  reduced  below  atmospheric 
pressure. 

A  common  form  of  gauge  is  shown  in  Figs.  40  and  41. 

The  curved  tube  A,  Fig.  40,  is  flattened  slightly  and 


54 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


tends  to  straighten  out,  just  as  your  garden  hose  does, 
when  pressure  is  applied  to  the  inside  through  the  tap. 
This  moves  the  pointer  across  the  dial. 

The  air  pump  may  be  used  for  compressing  air  or  for 
exhausting  the  air  from  a  chamber  and  producing  a  vacuum. 

In  the  latter  the  piston  and 
valves  are  arranged  in  a  manner 
similar  to  those  of  the  water 
pump  already  considered,  except 
that  in  good  pumps  the  valves 
are  arranged  to  work  mechani- 
cally as  the  pressure  of  the  air 
soon  becomes  too  small  to  work 
them.  Suppose  an  air  pump  to 
be  so  constructed  that  the  cylin- 
der is  one-third  as  large  as  the 
chamber  from  which  the  air  is  to 
be  removed.  As  the  piston  is 
lifted,  the  air  of  the  chamber 
expands  to  follow  the  piston; 
one-third  is  added  to  the  volume, 
and  the  air  expands  from  i  to  f 
its  first  volume.  One-fourth  of 
the  air  is  therefore  removed  from 
the  chamber.  The  next  stroke  re- 
moves one-fourth  of  the  remain- 
der. Therefore,  after  each  stroke 

there  remains  in  the  receiver  f  of  the  quantity  present  at 
the  beginning  of  the  stroke.  After  the  tenth  stroke  there- 
fore, there  would  remain  (f)10  of  the  beginning  quantity 
of  gas.  A  little  consideration  will  show  that  an  air  pump 
cannot  produce  a  perfect  vacuum.  Examine  the  dash 
pot  of  a  large  Corliss  Engine,  and  explain  how  the  air  pres- 
sure is  made  to  close  the  cylinder  valves  quickly. 


FIG.  40. 

The  curved  tube  A  is  flat- 
tened slightly  and  tends  to 
straighten  out,  just  as  your 
garden  hose  does,  when  pres- 
sure is  applied  to  the  inside 
through  the  tap.  This  moves 
the  pointer  across  the  dial. 


MECHANICS    OF   FLUIDS 


55 


TECHNICAL 
HIOH-  SCHOOL 


FIG.  41.  —  Pressure  and  Vacuum  Gauges. 

These  read  in  pounds  per  square  inch  above  or  below  the  pressure 
of  the  atmosphere.  The  two  lower  dials  read  the  pressure  in  the  con- 
densing chambers.  Why  does  the  vacuum  scale  run  to  15  only? 

At  the  surface  of  any  liquid,  a  thin  layer  of  molecules  is 
under  tension  so  that  it  acts  like  a  thin  elastic  membrane 
stretched  over  the  surface.  It  will  be  seen  in  Fig.  42  that 
a  molecule  at  the  center  of  a  very  small  circle  with  its 
centre  at  the  surface  will  be  attracted  by  the  molecules 


56 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


near  it  in  quadrants  (6)  and  (c),  and  there  will  be  no  mole- 
cules in  (d)  and  (a)  to  balance  this  force.  Hence  the  surface 
will  be  stretched.  This  is  called  surface  tension.  A  fine 
steel  needle  may  be  supported  by  the  surface  tension  of 
water. 

In  Fig.  43,  water  is  shown  in  contact  with  glass.  Here 
in  the  circle  drawn,  a  molecule  of  water  near  the  glass  is 
attracted  by  the  glass  in  quadrants  (a)  and  (6),  which  is 
greater  than  the  attraction  of  the  water  in  (c),  and  the 


an 
H 

1=HI 

FIG.  42. 


Water  adheres  to  clean  glass.     If 
the  glass  be  oiled  what  is  the  result? 

surface  of  the  water  rises  in  a  curve  near  the  glass.  If  a 
small  tube  is  used,  as  in  Fig.  43,  the  water  will  rise  in  the 
glass  tube. 

If  the  tube  is  very  small  (a  capillary  tube),  the  water  will 
rise  a  considerable  height.  The  absorption  of  ink  by  a 
blotter  or  the  rising  of  oil  in  the  wick  of  a  lamp  are  familiar 
examples  of  capillarity.  If  the  attraction  of  the  mole- 
cules of  the  liquid  in  the  quadrant  (c)  is  greater  than  that 
of  the  molecules  in  (a)  and  (6),  as  is  the  case  with  mercury 
and  glass,  the  surface  is  depressed  as  in  Fig.  44. 

In  Fig.  45,  suppose  a  cube  one  foot  on  each  edge  be 
placed  with  its  upper  surface  parallel  to  the  surface  of 
the  water  and  two  feet  below  it,  the  downward  pressure 
on  the  upper  surface  would  then  be  125  pounds,  and  the 


MECHANICS    OF    FLUIDS 


57 


upward  pressure  on  the  lower  surface  would  be  187.5.     The 

difference  between  these  two  would  be  62.5  pounds  and  is 

acting  against  gravity.     The  cube  would  appear  to  lose  in 

weight  by  the  amount  of 

62.5   pounds,    an   amount 

equal  to  the  weight  of  a 

cube  of  water  of  the  same 

size.     This    excess  of  up- 
ward   pressure    is     called 

buoyancy.     Archimedes 

stated    the     principle     of 

buoyancy  as  follows:    "A 

body  immersed  in  a  fluid  will  lose  in  weight  an  amount  equal 

to  the  weight  of  the  fluid  displaced.'' 

This  principle  of  Archimedes  applies  also  to  any  body  in 

air;  it  is  lifted  or  loses  by  an  amount  equal  to  the  weight 

of  air  displaced.  A 
sphere  weighed  in  air 
and  then  in  a  vacuum 
will  weigh  more  in  the 
latter  case.  Suppose  a 
pound  of  lead  and  a 
pound  of  feathers  are 
each  weighed  in  air  and 
then  weighed  in  a  vacu- 
um, would  the  weight 
be  the  same?  Would  a 
balloon  rise  in  a  vacu- 
um? Why  does  a  bal- 
loon rise  to  a  certain 
height  and  then  not  go 

"  any    higher.     If   a   bal- 

loon be  closed  air-tight, 

why  will  it  burst  when  it  reaches  a  high  altitude? 


58  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

A  body  lighter  than  a  fluid  in  which  it  is  immersed  will 
be  lifted  by  a  force  equal  to  the  weight  displaced  and  will 
rise  and  float  at  the  surface,  displacing  fluid  equal  to  its 
weight.  How  many  cubic  feet  of  water  will  a  500-ton  ship 
displace?  Why  does  a  row  boat  sink  deeper  into  the  water 
when  a  person  steps  into  it?  If  the  person  weighs  151.5 
pounds,  how  much  water  will  the  boat  displace  due  to  his 
being  in  it?  Why  will  a  good  egg  sink  in  fresh  water  and 
float  in  salt  water? 

The  specific  gravity  of  a  body  is  the  ratio  between  its 
weight  and  the  weight  of  an  equal  volume  of  water.  If 
the  cube  in  Fig.  20  were  cast-iron,  it  would  weigh  450 
pounds  when  weighed  in  air.  Weighed  in  water  the  weight 
would  be  387.5;  the  loss  of  weight  is  62.5  pounds.  The 
specific  gravity  then  is  450  -4-  62.5  or  7.2. 

In  using  the  metric  system  it  is  customary  to  use  the 
term  density  instead  of  specific  gravity.  Density  is  the 
quantity  of  matter  per  unit  volume  usually  expressed  in 
grams  per  cubic  centimeter.  The  gram  is  the  weight  of 
one  cubic  centimeter  of  water.  Hence,  if  we  take  one 
cubic  centimeter  of  cast-iron,  which  is  7.2  times  as  heavy 
as  water,  it  will  weigh  7.2  grams.  Specific  gravity  and 
density  in  the  metric  system  are  numerically  the  same. 
The  specific  gravity  of  a  few  substances  is  given  in  the  fol- 
lowing table. 

The  density  of  most  substances  will  vary  in  different 
samples  and  will  differ  somewhat  from  these  figures. 


Substance 
Ash  (dry)  

Specific  gravity  or 
density  per  cu.  cm. 

0.70  

Weight,  pounds 
per  cubic  foot. 

43.7 

Ash  (green) 

.      .         0.84 

528 

Acetic  Acid 

1  062 

664 

Alcohol  

0.80     

50. 

Aluminium  .  , 

.   2.65  . 

.    165.6 

MECHANICS    OF    FLUIDS  59 

< 

Beech   0.69  to  .852   53.2 

Cedar   0.561 35. 

Cork  0.24 15. 

Copper  (cast) 8.81  550.6 

Copper  (sheet) 8.88 555. 

Brass 8.38  to  8.44    527.5 

Gold   19.50 1218.8 

Hydrochloric  acid     1.22 75.2 

Iron  (wrought)    7.68  to  7.78    

Iron  (cast) 7.20  to  7.24   449. 

Lead   11.36 709.7 

Lignum  Vitoe 1.33 83.3 

Maple 0.75 46. 

Mercury 13.6 850. 

Milk   1.032 64.5 

Nitric  Acid 1.22  to  1.56    

Oak 0.85  to  1.17 

Pine 0.46  to  0.60   

Platinum    21.5 1348.8 

Sea  water  (about) 1.03 64.4 

Silver 10.5 656.3 

Spruce 0.5 31.2 

Steel   7.84 490. 

Sulphuric  acid 1.84 115.1 

Tin  (cast) 7.29 455.8 

Walnut 0.67 41.6 

Water 1.00 62.5 

Zinc  (cast) 6.9 431.3 

The  principle  of  Archimedes  furnishes  an  easy  method 
of  finding  the  specific  gravity  of  a  solid  which  is  insoluble 
in  water.  The  body  is  weighed  in  air  and  then  in  water. 
As  a  body  loses  in  weight,  an  amount  equal  to  the  weight 
of  water  is  displaced,  and  the  loss  is  the  weight  of  an  equal 
amount  of  water.  Divide  the  weight  in  air  by  the  loss  of 
weight  in  water  and  the  result  is  the  specific  gravity.  If 
the  solid  be  lighter  than  water,  a  sinker  is  tied  on  to  sub- 
merge it.  Explain  the  mathematics  in  this  case.  The 
specific  gravity  or  density  of  a  solid  may  be  found  if  its 


60  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

shape  is  such  that  its  volume  can  be  measured  by  getting 
its  volume  in  cubic  centimeters  and  dividing  the  weight 
in  grams  by  the  volume  in  cubic  centimeters.  Why  is 
this  equal  to  the  specific  gravity? 

The  specific  gravity  of  a  liquid  may  be  found  by  filling 
a  bottle  with  water  and  weighing  it,  then  with  a  given 
liquid  and  weighing  it  again.  The  weight  of  the  liquid 
divided  by  the  weight  of  the  same  volume  of  water  gives 
the  specific  gravity. 

The  hydrometer  is  a  glass  tube  terminating  at  its  lower 
end  in  a  bulb  filled  with  shot  or  mercury  to  cause  the  tube 
to  float  in  a  vertical  position.  A  floating  body  displaces  a 
weight  of  liquid  equal  to  its  own  weight.  If  the  hydrom- 
eter is  placed  in  water  it  will  sink  to  some  certain  point; 
this  point  is  marked  1.  If  it  be  placed  in  a  lighter  liquid 
it  will  have  to  sink  deeper  to  displace  its  weight.  A  scale 
is  marked  on  the  tube  so  that  when  placed  in  any  liquid, 
the  mark  at  the  surface  of  the  liquid  indicates  the  specific 
gravity. 

Problems 

1.  Explain  the  principle  on  which  the  so-called  suction  pump  acts. 

2.  Explain  the  action  of  a  siphon. 

3.  Can  a  perfect  vacuum  be  produced  with  an  air  pump? 

4.  In  what  respects  is  the  pressure  of  the  atmosphere  similar  to 
the  pressure  of  a  liquid? 

5.  How  high  a  column  of  liquid,  whose  specific  gravity  is  2,  will 
the  pressure  of  the  atmosphere  support? 

6.  How  is  the  pressure  of  the  atmosphere  measured? 

7.  How  is  the  degree  of  a  vacuum  in  a  vessel  measured? 

8.  An   oak    timber   is    4"X  6"  X  12'.     What    is   its    weight?     If 
floating  on  water,  what  portion  of  its  volume  will  be  submerged? 

9.  A  barge  12  feet  wide  and  30  feet  long  with  vertical  sides  is  float- 
ing in  fresh  water.     An  elephant  is  led  onto  the  barge,  and  when  all 
is  still  it  is  found  that  the  barge  has  settled  2  inches  deeper  than  it 
was  before.     How  much  does  the  elephant  weigh? 

10.  An  irregular  casting  weighs,  in  air,  1047.6  pounds,  and  in  water, 


MECHANICS    OF    FLUIDS  61 

922.6  pounds.     What  is  its  volume?     What  is  its  specific  gravity? 
What  kind  of  metal  is  it? 

11.  Will  a  piece  of  solid  steel  float  on  water?     Will  a  steel  boat 
float  on  water?     Will  a  piece  of  solid  steel  float  on  mercury?     Why? 

12.  A  vat  in  the  shape  of  a  cube  3  feet  on  an  edge  is  filled  with 
mercury.     What  is  the  total  pressure  on  the  bottom  and  the  total 
pressure  on  one  side? 

13.  When  the  barometer  stands  at  30  inches,  what  is  the  pressure 
of  the  atmosphere  per  square  inch,  when  the  barometer  is  28.9  inches? 

14.  In  making  the  casting  for  the  base  of  a  dynamo,  the  top  of 
the  riser  is  24  inches  above  the  base  of  the  casting.     When  first  poured, 
what  is  the  pressure  per  square  inch  at  the  action  of  the  casting.     If 
in  the  above  problem  the  riser  has  a  height  of  12  inches  above  a  given 
point  of  the  top  of  a  casting  and  the  specific  gravity  of  sand  is  1.8 
what  pressure  per  square  inch  must  be  applied  to  the  surface  of  the 
sand  to  keep  it  from  lifting  or  "blowing"?     Work  this  problem  men- 
tally, getting  only  the  approximate  result  by  the  method  used  in  the 
foundry. 


CHAPTER  IV 
STRENGTH   OF     MATERIALS 

ELASTICITY  has  been  denned  as  the  resistance  a  body 
offers  to  change  its  shape  or  volume,  or  the  tendency  a 
body  has  to  return  to  its  original  shape  after  being  dis- 
torted. If  distorted  beyond  a  certain  point  a  body  will 
take  a  permanent  "  set,"  that  is,  fail  to  return  to  its  first 
form.  This  point  is  called  the  elastic  limit.  A  force  tending 
to  produce  change  of  form  or  volume  in  a  body  is  a  stress. 
Any  resulting  distortion  which  takes  place  is  a  strain. 
Within  the  elastic  limit  the  strain  is  proportional  to  the 
stress.  In  designing  machines,  bridges,  buildings,  etc.,  it  be- 
comes necessary  to  know  the  strength  of  the  materials  used, 
up  to  the  elastic  limit,  and  to  make  them  of  such  a  size  and 
shape  that  the  greatest  stress  they  will  ever  be  subjected  to 
will  not  produce  a  strain  coming  anywhere  near  to  the 
elastic  limit.  If  a  given  rod  in  a  bridge  must  support  a 
given  pull  when  the  bridge  is  carrying  its  greatest  load,  the 
rod  is  usually  large  enough  and  of  such  material  that  the 
stress  will  not  exceed  one-fourth  or  one-fifth  of  the  stress 
which  would  strain  it  to  the  elastic  limit.  This  is  said  to 
give  a  " safety"  factor  of  four  or  five. 

The  term  " stress"  is  here  used  to  mean  the  total  force 
causing  the  distortion,  not  the  more  specific  meaning  of 
the  term,  namely,  force  per  unit  area.  In  the  same  way 
the  word  strain  is  used  to  denote  the  total  distortion. 

Stresses  are  classified  according  to  the  kind  of  strain 
they  produce,  as  follows:  tensile  or  pulling  stress;  trans- 

62 


STRENGTH   OF   MATERIALS  63 

verse  or  bending  stress;  compression  or  pushing  stress; 
shearing  or  cutting  stress;  tortional  or  twisting  stress.  A 
wire  carrying  a  load  is  under  tensile  stress,  a  column  sup- 
porting part  of  a  building  is  under  compression.  The 
piston  rod  of  an  engine  is  alternately  under  tension  and 
compression.  The  rod  used  to  turn  the  head  of  a  jack- 
screw  is  under  bending  stress.  A  rivet  holding  together 
the  plates  of  a  boiler  or  the  crank  pin  in  an  engine  are 
subject  to  shearing  stress.  The  shaft  transmitting  power 
in  a  shop  is  under  tortional  stress. 

The  tensile  strength  of  any  material  is  the  resistance  it 
offers  to  being  torn  apart.  The  tensile  strength  of  any 
body  is  proportional  to  its  minimum  cross  section.  To 
find  the  tensile  strength  of  any  body  it  is  necessary  to  know 
its  tensile  strength  per  square  unit  area  and  multiply  this 
by  the  area  of  the  smallest  cross  section  of  the  body.  The 
tensile  strength  of  such  metals  as  iron  depends  upon  the 
treatment  they  have  received.  Samples  of  metals  to  be 
tested  are  placed  in  machines  capable  of  pulling  the  samples 
apart  and  arranged  to  measure  the  stress  at  which  the 
samples  break.  This  is  called  the  ultimate  strength  or 
the  breaking  stress,  and  when  divided  by  the  cross  section 
of  the  samples  gives  the  breaking  stress  per  unit  cross 
section.  Tables  giving  the  ultimate  strength  or  breaking 
stress  per  square  inch  for  the  common  materials  will  be 
found  in  any  engineering  hand  book. 

If  the  load  is  to  be  repeatedly  applied  suddenly  the  usual 
engineering  practice  is  to  use  a  safety  factor  of  about  10. 
An  example  of  such  loading  is  the  piston  rod  of  a  recipro- 
cating engine.  If  the  variations  in  load  are  to  be  gradually 
applied,  5  is  usually  considered  a  safe  factor.  The  ultimate 
tensile  strength  of  a  few  metals  in  pounds  per  square  inch 
is  as  follows.  It  must  be  remembered  that  great  variation 
is  found  in  different  samples. 


64 


APPLIED   PHYSICS 


Breaking  stress  in  thousand  pounds  per  square  inch 

Brass  cast    15  to    20 

Copper 20  to    30 

Iron  cast 15  to    20 

Iron  wrought 40  to   50 

Steel  axle 70  to    90 

Steel  machine 50  to    75 

Steel  tool  90  to  150 

Steel  Vanadium 100  to  200 

What  force  will  probably  be  required  to  pull  apart  a 
3-inch  rod  of  soft  steel?  What  size  machine  steel  rod  will  be 
required  to  carry  safely  a  gradually  applied  load  of  ten  tons? 

In  the  case  of  chains  the  form  of  the  links  has  much  to 
do  with  the  load  the  chain  will  lift  before  breaking.  The 
Lufkins  Iron  and  Steel  Co.  publish  tables  giving  the  break- 
ing stress  for  their  chains  in  pounds  for  each  size  rod  used 
in  making  the  links  from  ft  to  3  inches. 

The  shearing  strength  of  any  body  is  the  resistance  it 
offers  to  being  cut  in  two.  Fig.  46  shows  a  body  subject 


FIG.  46.  —  Single  Shear. 


FIG.  47.  —  Double  Shear. 


to  a  single  shear.  Fig.  47  shows  a  body  subject  to  a  double 
shear.  The  ultimate  shearing  strength  is  proportional  to 
the  cross  section.  Under  most  circumstances  the  stress 
required  to  shear  a  body  in  double  shear  is  twice  that 
required  to  shear  a  body  in  a  single  shear.  But  it  has  been 
found  by  experiment  that  iron  and  steel  rivets  will  give 
way  under  double  shear  at  about  1.8  times  their  ultimate 
strength  in  single  shear. 

In  case  wood  is  subjected  to  shear,  the  force  required 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS  65 

to  cut  it  will  be  much  less  if  the  stress  is  applied  parallel 
to  the  grain  than  if  it  is  applied  across  it. 

The  average  shearing  strength  of  a  few  materials,  in 
pounds  per  square  inch  cross  section,  follows.  In  determin- 
ing the  cross  section  needed  to  carry  a  given  load,  or  in 
finding  what  safe  load  a  body  of  a  given  cross  section  will 
carry,  use  a  safety  factor  of  10  if  the  load  is  to  be  repeatedly 
applied  suddenly,  or  a  safety  factor  of  four  or  five  if  the 
load  is  to  be  gradually  applied. 

Shearing  strength  in  thousand  pounds  per  square  inch 

Iron  cast 16  to    30 

Iron  wrought 40  to    60 

Iron  rivets 30  to    50 

Oak  (parallel  to  grain) 500  to  800  pounds 

Oak  (across  the  grain)0 4  to  6  thousand 

Steel 40  to  80 

In  the  forge  shop  is  a  machine  for  cutting  off  bar  iron. 
The  hand  lever  has  a  force  arm  of  6  feet  and  a  weight  arm 
of  3  inches.  This  operates  the  cutting  arm  with  a  force 
arm  of  two  feet  and  a  weight  arm  of  3  inches.  What  force 
must  be  applied  to  shear  a  T%  square  bar  of  wrought  iron? 
If  the  cutting  arm  swings  on  a  f-inch  bolt  of  wrought  iron 
in  double  shear,  how  large  a  bar  would  it  be  safe  to  cut 
with  the  machine? 

The  crushing  strength  of  materials  is  the  resistance  to 
a  force  tending  to  compress  it.  If  the  length  of  a  column 
is  not  greater  than  five  times  its  diameter  or  its  least 
thickness  when  rectangular,  it  is  called  a  short  column. 
For  such  a  column  the  crushing  strength  resists  compres- 
sion only.  If  the  length  is  greater  than  five  times  the 
least  diameter,  we  have  compression  and  bending  com- 
bined. 

If  the  ultimate  crushing  strength  of  brick  be  taken  at 
6 


66  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

800  pounds  per  square  inch,  what  load  will  a  brick  founda- 
tion 8  inches  square  carry  with  safety  factor  of  six? 

For  a  long  column  (one  from  5  to  40  times  as  long  as  its 
least  diameter)  the  compression  strength  combined  with 
the  bending  will  depend  upon  the  shape  of  the  cross  sec- 
tion as  well  as  its  size.  A  constant  depending  upon  the 
shape  of  the  cross  section  must  be  used  with  the  above 
values.  Such  constants  determined  by  experiment  for 
solid  round  and  rectangular,  hollow  round  and  rectangular, 
angle,  cross,  and  T  beams  will  be  found  in  any  engineering 
hand  book. 

Transverse  strength  of  materials  is  the  resistance  the 
material  offers  to  being  broken  by  bending. 

If  a  beam  or  rod  is  rigidly  supported  at  one  end  and  free 
at  the  other  it  is  called  cantilever.  The  rod  used  to  turn 
the  head  of  a  jack-screw  would  be  considered  cantilever. 

It  will  be  remembered  that  the  force  applied  is  the  stress, 
while  the  amount  of  distortion  is  the  strain.  The  archi- 
tect or  the  machinist  sometimes  meets  the  problem  of 
transverse  strength  in  a  form  which  requires  him  to  com- 
pute what  size  rod  or  beam  will  be  required  to  carry  a  given 
load  without  the  resulting  strain  exceeding  a  specified 
amount:  sometimes  he  is  required  to  find  what  safe  work- 
ing load  a  beam  will  support. 

It  has  been  found  that  if  a  beam  is  supported  at  the  ends 
and  loaded  in  the  middle  the  strain  is  proportional  to  the 
load  and  to  the  cube  of  the  length  and  inversely  propor- 
tional to  the  breadth  and  to  the  cube  of  the  depth. 

WP 

That  is  S  =  k  -=r- 

d?b 

As  indicated  in  Fig.  48,  w  =  load,  I  =  length  between 
supports,  d  =  depth,  b  =  breadth  of  beam,  and  k  =  a 
constant  which  depends  upon  the  material  used  and  must 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS  67 

be    determined    by   experiments;    s  =  bend    or    displace- 
ment. 

If  a  beam  of  a  given  size  is  found  to  bend  one-eighth  of 
an  inch  with  a  certain  load  it  will,  if  everything  else  re- 
mains the  same,  bend  one- 

quarter  inch  under  twice  the.    .  —  —  ^—  —  ^  -    & 

load.     If   the   load   remains     |j<  l  _  H_l  d 

the  same  as  the  first,  while 
the  breadth   be   doubled,   it 


will  bend   only   one-half   as    ,0  How 

much  or  one-sixteenth  inch,     may  the   load   be   placed?    The 

' 


while  if  the  depth  be  doubled     ^  *"" 


it  will  bend  only  one-eighth 

as  much  or  one  sixty-fourth  inch.     If  the  length  or  clear 

span  be  doubled,  the  bend  will  be  eight  times  as  much. 

The  value  of  a  constant  for  a  given  material  is  determined 
by  experiment.  If  W  is  given  in  pounds,  deflection  or  bend 
in  inches,  span  in  feet,  breadth  and  depth  in  inches,  the 
following  constants  are  given  in  the  engineering  table  by 
Troutwine.* 

Oak  .......................................  00023 

Hickory  ...................................  00016 

White  pine   ................................  00032 

Cast-iron  ..................................  000027 

How  much  will  an  oak  beam  8X8  inches  resting  on 
supports  6  feet  apart  bend  under  a  load  of  2000  pounds  at 
its  center?  In  building  practice  it  is  considered  that  a 
beam  should  not  bend  more  than  ?V  inch  per  foot  of  length. 

*  For  other  values  the  reader  is  referred  to  Troutwine's  Hand- 
book for  1908,  page  484. 


68  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

Problems 

1.  Why  is  the  rod  of  a  tension  member  in  a  bridge  truss  "upset" 
before  the  thread  is  cut? 

2.  What  load  will  probably  be  required  to  break  a  1-inch  round 
rod  of  wrought-iron? 

3.  What  load  will  be  required  to  crush  a  short  rod  of  machine  steel 
1  inch  in  diameter?   If  a  groove  -J-  inch  deep  is  cut  around  the  rod,  what 
load  will  be  required  to  crush  it? 

4.  The  screw  of  a  jack-screw  is  f  inch  in  diameter,  8  pitch,  square 
thread,  and  made  of  machine  steel. 

If  the  crushing  strength  of  machinery  steel  is  taken  as  60,000  pounds 
per  square  inch  and  its  shearing  strength  is  52,000  pounds  per  square 
inch,  what  must  be  the  length  of  the  thread  on  the  screw  in  order  that 
it  may  sustain  the  full  crushing  load  of  the  steel? 

5.  What  is  the  maximum  load  such  a  screw  will  sustain? 

6.  On  what  diameter  do  you  base  the  figures  for  crushing  and 
shearing  strength?     Why? 

7.  If  the  shearing  strength  of  cast-iron  is  taken  as  16,000  pounds  per 
square  inch,  what  must  be  the  length  of  the  thread  in  the  base  in  order 
that  it  'may  sustain  the  full  crushing  load  of  steel? 

8.  On  what  diameter  do  you  base  the  figure?     Why? 

Note.  The  shearing  area  in  the  above  need  not  be  figured  on  the 
incline  of  the  thread. 

9.  At  a  radius  of  6  inches,  how  much  force  must  be  applied  to  the 
lever  in  order  to  raise  the  full  load,  supposing  that  50%  of  the  power 
is  lost  in  friction? 

10.  What  load  will  such  a  jack  raise  if  the  thread  in  the  cast-iron 
base  is  f  inch  long? 

11.  What  proportions  would  you  recommend  for  a  jack-screw  that 
is  to  raise  twenty-five  tons?    Why? 


CHAPTER  V 
SOUND 

IF  a  person  in  a  boat  in  the  middle  of  a  pond  drops  a 
stone  into  the  water,  a  series  of  waves  is  started  which 
will  spread  in  circles  until  it  reaches  the  edge  or  dies  out. 
If  a  series  of  chips  are  placed  on  the  water  they  will  be 
caused  to  dance  up  and  down  but  will  not  be  carried  for- 
ward. The  particles  of  water,  that  is,  the  molecules, 
dance  up  and  down  in  the  same  way  and  are  not  carried 
forward.  The  same  thing  may  be  seen  in  a  field  of  ripen- 
ing wheat  on  a  windy  day.  A  wave  starts  at  one  side  of 
the  field  and  moves  across  to  the  other  side.  Any  one 
head  of  wheat  moves  back  and  forth,  yet  the  wave  motion 
moves  forward.  Suppose  an  elastic  ball,  capable  of  expand- 
ing and  contracting,  were  fastened  in  the  middle  of  this 
room  by  elastic  strings  running  out  in  every  direction  to 
all  sides  and  edges  of  the  room  and  all  stretched.  If  the 
ball  were  suddenly  to  expand,  an  impulse  would  be  sent 
out  in  every  direction  to  the  sides  of  the  room.  When  it 
contracted,  an  impulse  in  the  opposite  direction  would  be 
sent  out  in  all  directions.  This  is  a  wave  motion,  and 
the  front  of  any  wave  will  be  the  surface  of  the  sphere. 
A  wave  motion  or  vibration  of  the  frequency  (number  per 
second)  which  will  be  received  by  the  ear,  is  sound.  . 

For  the  transmission  of  sound  the  student  will  readily 
recognize  that  three  things  are  necessary,  a  vibrating  body 
to  start  the  disturbance,  some  substance  in  which  the 
wave  motion  may  travel,  and  a  receiving  instrument 
capable  of  detecting  the  waves  or  vibrations. 


70  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

If  one  end  of  a  rope  be  held  in  the  hand  and  given  a 
sudden  jerk  side  wise,  it  will  be  set  into  vibration.  These 
vibrations  will  be  at  right  angles  to  the  length  of  the  rope 
and  will,  for  that  reason,  be  called  transverse  vibrations. 
In  the  case  of  the  rubber  bands  holding  the  ball,  the  vibra- 
tions were  parallel  to  the  length  of  the  band  and  hence 
would  be  called  longitudinal  vibrations.  In  case  of  air 
vibrating,  the  air  has  no  tensile  strength  to  hold  it  together ; 
hence  there  can  be  no  transverse  vibration,  as  one  mole- 
cule would  not  pull  the  next  one  after  it.  A  vibration  in 
air  is  set  up  when  a  few  molecules  are  pressed  forward 
and  crowded  against  the  next  ones.  This  compresses  the  air 
at  one  point,  and  its  elasticity  causes  the  molecules  in  the 
front  of  the  disturbance  to  leap  forward  and  those  in  the 
rear  to  rebound.  At  a  given  point  in  the  air  we  would  have 
molecules  crowded  together  and  then  separated  more  than 
the  average  or  a  condensation  or  rarefaction,  and  these 
would  move  forward  as  the  waves  in  the  water  did  and  we 
would  have  a  wave  motion.  The  frequency  is  the  number 
of  vibrations  per  second,  and  the  wave  length  is  the  dis- 
tance from  a  point  on  one  wave  to  the  corresponding  point 
on  the  next  wave. 

As  a  wave  moves  forward  by  the  successive  crowding 
of  the  molecules,  we  would  expect  to  find  that  it  took  time 
for  a  disturbance  to  travel  a  given  distance.  This  is  con- 
firmed by  the  experience  of  every  one  who  has  had  his  eyes 
open  at  all.  If  you  have  watched  a  train  at  some  dis- 
tance you  have  noticed  that  the  escaping  steam  can  be  seen 
before  the  sound  of  the  whistle  is  heard.  The  flash  of  a 
gun  will  be  seen  before  the  sound  of  the  report  is  heard. 

This  is  because  it  takes  the  sound  some  time  to  travel 
the  distance  between  the  gun  and  the  ear.  The  velocity 
of  the  sound  has  been  measured  by  several  methods  and 
it  is  found  to  be  about. 1087  feet  or  331.4  meters  per  second 


SOUND 


71 


at  0°  C.,  that  is  32°  F.  It  is  found  that  the  velocity  varies 
directly  as  the  square  root  of  the  elasticity,  and  inversely 
as  the  square  root  of  the  density  of  the  medium  in  which 
the  wave  moves.  Since  oxygen  is  16  times  as  dense  as 
hydrogen,  at  the  same  temperature  and  pressure  the  veloc- 
ity of  sound  will  be  four  times  as  great  in  hydrogen  as  in 
oxygen.  Temperature  changes  produce  changes  both  in 
elasticity  and  density  of  air,  and  therefore  in  velocity  of 
sound.  A  rise  in  temperature  of  1°  C.  increases  the  veloc- 
ity of  sound  .6  meter  or  about  2  feet  per  second.  What 
would  be  the  velocity  at  20°  C.?  2  X  20  =  40  feet  increase. 


1087  +  40  =  1127  feet  velocity. 


When 


Suppose  a  bell  is  vibrating  256  times  per  second, 
it  has  been  vibrating  for  one 
second  when  the  velocity  is  1087 
feet  per  second,  the  first  wave 
sent  out  would  be  1087  feet 
from  the  bell,  and  between  that 
point  and  the  bell  the  whole 
256  waves  will  be  found.  If  it 
were  possible  to  take  a  snapshot 
of  the  series,  we  would  have 
256  waves  arranged  in  order. 
The  length  of  one  of  these 
waves  will  be  1087  -f-  256  or 
4.24  feet.  A  little  considera- 
tion will  make  it  evident  that 
if  N  =  frequency,  /  =  wave 
length  and  v  =  velocity  in  feet  seems  to  come  from  a  center 

npr  sproTiH     V  -    NJ  beyond  the  reflecting  surface. 

Id,    V      -    1ML  Thfi  ppho  from  a  wall  Qr  the 


FIG.  49. 


When   a   wave   strikes   a   flat    echo   in   the   forest    are   ex- 
surface  it  is  reflected  as  in  Fig.    amPles- 
49  and  appears  to  come  from  a  new  center.     This  reflected 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


s  —  *•=  —  ;____--  —  - 

ZJ 

1  VC_==__---- 

l^a 

FIG.  50. 

When  the  air  column 
is    adjusted    to    one- 
fourth  the  wave  length 
produced  by  the  fork, 
a    loud    resonance    is 

U& 

1! 

heard. 

sound  is  an  echo.  If  the  echo  of  a  gunshot  is  heard  in 
five  seconds  when  reflected  from  a  cliff,  how  far  away 
is  the  cliff,  temperature  being  20°  C.? 

If  a  tuning  fork  vibrating  with  a  given  frequency  be  held 
above  an  air  column  whose  length  can  be  changed,  as  in 

Fig.  50,  and  then  the  length 
can  be  adjusted  so  that,  while 
the  fork  is  vibrating  from  (a) 
to  (b),  the  condensation  started 
at  the  fork  downward  from  (a) 
has  time  to  travel  down  to  (c) 
and  back  to  (6)  exactly  as  the 
fork  is  ready  to  start  back 
from  (6)  to  (a),  we  will  have 
the  reflected  condensation  and 
the  condensation  of  the  fork 

together,  and  the  sound  will  be  very  loud.  The  movement 
of  the  fork  from  (a)  to  (b)  is  one-half  a  vibration;  if  the 
condensations  are  to  occur  at  the  same  time,  the  distance 
from  (a)  to  (c)  and  back  to  (a)  must  be  one-half  a  wave- 
length in  air;  that  is,  the  length  of  the  air  column  must  be 
one-quarter  wave-length. 

If  the  length  of  the  air  column  be  increased  by  one-half 
a  wave-length  in  air,  the  reflected  wave  will  come  back 
one  and  one-half-waves  behind  the  fork  and  will  again 
strengthen  the  sound.  When  a  vibration  is  reinforced  in 
this  way,  it  is  called  resonance.  The  air  column  is  called  a 
resonating  air  column.  This  principle  is  taken  advantage 
of  in  many  musical  instruments  as  will  be  seen  when  the 
student  studies  them.  Perhaps  the  best  example  is  the 
pipe  organ. 

Exactly  the  opposite  of  resonance  will  happen  if  two 
sounds  be  produced  so  that  one  tends  to  produce  a  con- 
densation at  the  same  time  the  other  tends  to  produce  a 


SOUND 


73 


rare  faction.  Then  the  two  will  strike  a  given  particle  of 
air  at  the  same  time  and  no  movement  will  take  place. 
One  will  destroy  the  effect  of  the  other  or  interfere  with 
it;  hence  interference  takes  place.  This  may  be  illustrated 
by  slowly  revolving  the  fork  arranged  before  the  resonating 
tube,  as  in  Fig.  50. 

Sound  waves,  as  we  have  shown,  are  longitudinal,  but 
for  convenience  they  may  be  represented  as  in  Fig.  51. 
Let  the  full  line  represent  one  wave  series  and  the  dotted 
line  represent  a  second  one,  starting  both,  as  at  a,  but  of 
different  frequency.  Then  if  they  start  together  or  in  the 
same  phase,  that  is,  the  same  part  of  the  wave  at  the  same 


FIG.  51. 

time,  one  will  gain  on  the  other  and  soon  we  will  find  them 
as  at  6,  exactly  opposite  each  other,  that  is,  in  opposite 
phase,  so  that  one  tends  to  produce  a  rarefaction  at  the 
same  time  that  the  other  tends  to  produce  condensation. 
The  result  would  be  mutual  destruction  or  no  sound  at 
all.  This  is  called  interference.  A  little  later  we  will  find 
them  as  at  d,  where  one  has  gained  a  complete  vibration 
on  the  other  and  both  are  in  the  same  phase,  that  is,  both 
tend  to  produce  condensation  at  the  same  time  and  place. 
The  result  is  a  condensation  which  effects  the  ear  very 
strongly  and  the  sound  seems  loud.  The  combined  sound 
is  first  loud  and  then  less  so,  the  loud  stages  being  called 
beats. 
When  a  pendulum  is  vibrating,  the  distance  from  its 


74  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

point  of  rest  to  one  end  of  its  swing  is  its  amplitude.  When 
a  bell  or  string  or  other  sounding  body  is  vibrating,  if  its 
amplitude  is  small,  it  strikes  the  air  with  little  force  and  the 
amplitude  of  each  particle  of  air  is  small;  while,  if  it  is  set 
in  motion  with  a  greater  amplitude,  it  strikes  the  air  with 
more  force  and  the  air  is  more  strongly  effected.  The 
latter  sound  is  louder  than  the  first;  loudness  depends  upon 
the  amplitude  of  vibration. 

A  pendulum  has  a  fixed  time  of  vibrating  which  is  inde- 
pendent of  the  amplitude.  The  same  thing  is  nearly 
true  of  any  vibrating  body,  such  as  a  bell,  a  tuning  fork,  a 
plate,  or  wire. 

Most  vibrations  have  a  definite  frequency.  It  is  well 
known  that  if  a  vibrating  wire  is  tightened  so  as  to  increase 
its  frequency,  the  sound  will  be  of  a  higher  pitch.  Pitch 
depends  upon  frequency. 

If  a  sound  contains  a  mixture  of  a  lot  of  vibrations  of 
different  frequency  some  of  which  are  not  periodic,  it  is 
called  a  noise.  Such  would  result  from  clapping  the  hands 
or  stamping  the  feet.  If  the  vibration  is  regular,  or  periodic, 
the  sound  is  a  musical  tone. 

We  have  noted  that  the  pitch  of  a  tone  depends  upon  the 
frequency  or  number  of  vibrations  per  second.  The 
ratio  of  the  frequencies  of  two  tones  is  called  a  musical 
interval.  If  the  ratio  is  1,  the  tones  are  in  unison:  f, 
a  fifth;  |,  a  fourth;  {,  major  third;  If,  a  half  tone; 
2,  an  octave.  Four  tones  whose  frequencies  are  in  the 
ratio  of  4,  5,  6,  8,  are  a  major  cord. 

Probably  every  student  is  familiar  with  the  diatonic 
scale,  a  series  of  eight  notes  known  as  do,  re,  mi,  fa,  sol,  la, 
si,  do.  The  first  one  (do)  may  start  with  any  frequency. 
The  others  have  a  fixed  ratio  to  its  frequency.  The 
physicist  starts  with  a  key  note  of  256.  There  are  several 
musical  standards  at  present.  The  most  common  one  is  the 


SOUND  75 

international  pitch,  using  a  key  note,  C,  of  261  vibrations. 
The  following  table  will  show  how  the  scale  is  built  up. 

The  tempered  scale,  while  of  great  importance  in  music, 
is  omitted  here,  as  other  things  seem  to  have  a  stronger 
claim  on  the  time  of  the  student  in  a  one-year  course  of 
physics  in  a  secondary  school. 

SCALE 

Number...  12345678 
Letter   ....C         D         E          F          G         A         B          C 

Name do         re        me        fa        sol         la         si         do 

Ratio 1C     9/8C    5/4C    4/3C    3/2C    5/3C  15/8C     2C 

1st  octave  .  256      288      320     3411     334      426f     480      512 

2nd  octave.  512       576       640      682f      768     853J      960    1024 

Interval  ...  9/8     10/9  16/15    9/8     10/9      9/8    16/15 

We  have  now  discussed  loudness  and  pitch  and  must 
consider  one  other  important  characteristic  of  sound  — 
quality.  If  the  organ  pipe  is  blown  gently,  its  column  of 
air  will  be  set  vibrating  as  one  unit,  that  is,  in  one  segment. 
The  tone  which  will  be  the  lowest  that  pipe  ever  produces, 
is  called  its  fundamental  tone.  If  blown  a  little  harder,  a 
much  higher  pitch  will  be  given.  This  is  due  to  the  air 
column  being  broken  up  into  segments  and  caused  to 
vibrate  in  parts  instead  of  a  whole.  By  blowing  carefully, 
the  air  in  the  pipe  may  be  set  in  motion  so  that  it  produces 
both  tones  at  the  same  time  and  both  may  be  readily 
detected  by  the  ear.  The  sound  given  out  when  both  are 
produced  is  very  different  from  either  one  alone.  It  is 
said  to  have  different  quality.  The  higher  tone  is  an 
over-tone.  The  quality  of  a  tone  depends  upon  the  over- 
tones present.  Certain  over-tones  produce,  with  a  funda- 
mental, pleasant  effect  on  the  ear  and  give  a  rich,  full 
tone,  while  some  are  unpleasant  and  discordant.  The 
same  note  C  sounded  on  the  organ,  the  flute,  the  violin, 


76  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

and  the  piano  are  of  the  same  frequency,  but  the  different 
over-tones  in  them  give  them  a  very  different  quality  or 
timber.  Helmholtz  analyzed  sounds,  and  then,  by  strik- 
ing tuning-forks,  produced  all  the  same  over-tones  found  in 
a  given  note;  in  this  way  he  could  reproduce  or  imitate 
the  tones  of  different  instruments  so  closely  that  he  could 
deceive  the  ear. 

The  wire  as  a  vibrating  body  is  used  in  so  many  musical 
instruments  that  it  is  well  to  understand  the  laws  govern- 
ing the  vibration  frequency  of  stretched  wires.  It  is  found 
by  experiment  that  if  a  wire  is  vibrated,  either  by  a  violin 
bow  or  by  plucking  it  with  the  fingers,  it  gives  out  a  certain 
tone,  and  if  the  middle  point  is  held  so  that  each  half 
vibrates  as  a  half  length,  the  pitch  will  be  the  octave  of 
the  first  tone,  that  is,  the  frequency  is  doubled.  It  is 
found  that  if  the  tension  remains  constant  the  vibration 
frequency  is  inversely  proportional  to  the  length.  If  a 
wire  under  a  fixed  tension  sounds  middle  C  (256)  when 
its  length  is  60  cm.,  what  length  must  it  be  to  sound  G 
(384)?  The  tension  and  length  remaining  constant,  the 
vibration  number  varies  inversely  as  the  diameter.  The 
length  and  diameter  being  constant,  the  vibration  number 
varies  directly  as  the  square  root  of  the  tension. 

An  interesting  application  of  sound  vibration  is  found 
in  the  talking  machine.  There  are  several  on  the  market, 
but  all  work  on  the  same  principle  as  the  first  one  invented 
by  Thomas  A.  Edison.  A  cylinder  or  disk  of  wax  is  re- 
volved while  a  sharp  needle  point  carried  on  a  thin  flexible 
steel  plate  scratches  its  surface.  Any  sound  collected  in 
the  funnel  will  set  the  plate  vibrating  and  the  needle  will 
trace  these  vibrations  in  the  wax.  The  cylinder  is  moved 
forward  by  means  of  a  screw,  so  that  a  helix  is  traced  its 
entire  length.  A  needle  with  a  blunt  point  is  substituted 
in  place  of  the  sharp  one  and  the  cylinder  is  turned  again. 


MOLECULES  77 

This  time  the  hills  and  hollows  in  the  wax  will  cause  the 
needle  and  the  steel  diaphragm  to  vibrate  exactly  as  it 
did  before,  and  the  sound  will  be  reproduced  so  accurately 
that  even  a  dog  will  recognize  his  master's  voice.  It  was 
said  of  the  Chicago  Stock  Yards  that  they  saved  every 
part  of  the  pig  but  the  squeal;  now  they  pickle  the  squeal 
and  hand  it  out  at  the  five-cent  theaters. 

Problems 

1.  What  is  the  length  of  the  sound  wave  in  air  produced  by  a  tuning 
fork  vibrating  320  times  per  second,  the  temperature  being  20°? 

2.  If  a  bell  be  struck  by  a  hammer  the  sound  gradually  dies  away. 
Explain. 

3.  Why  is  the  pitch  of  a  sound  produced  by  a  phonograph  raised 
by  increasing  the  speed  of  the  cylinder? 

4.  A  siren  has  24  holes  in  the  disk  and  makes  1000  revolutions  per 
minute.     What  is  the  frequency  of  the  tone? 

5.  A  string  stretched  by  a  force  of  25  pounds  sounds  the  note  E. 
What  tension  must  it  have  to  sound  the  C  below? 

6.  What  are  the  three  characteristics  of  sound? 

7.  What  law  of  strings  does  the  violin  player  follow  with  his  left 
hand? 

8.  Will  the  pitch  of  an  organ  pipe  be  raised  or  lowered  by  a  rise  in 
temperature?     Of  a  piano? 


CHAPTER  VI 
LIGHT 

THE  universal  law  —  that  every  particle  of  matter  in  the 
universe  attracts  every  other  particle  in  the  universe  with 
a  force  inversely  proportional  to  the  square  of  the  distance 
between  their  centers  and  directly  proportional  to  the 
product  of  their  masses  —  enables  us  to  compute  the  force 
of  gravitation  between  any  two  bodies.  Beyond  this  law, 
stated  in  a  single  sentence,  how  much  does  man  know  about 
the  force  of  gravity? 

The  earth  is  held  to  the  sun  by  an  enormous  force. 
What  are  the  invisible  bands  holding  the  earth  with  the 
strength  of  steel  and  yet  perfectly  elastic?  Is  the  force 
a  pull  from  the  front  or  a  push  from  behind?  How  long 
does  it  take  this  force  to  reach  out  to  the  earth  and  harness 
it  to  the  solar  system?  Has  the  action  of  this  force  a 
definite  speed  or  is  it  instantaneous?  The  earth  attracts 
an  iron  casting  with  the  same  force,  whether  or  not  air, 
wood,  or  any  other  known  substance  is  between  them.  Are 
there  any  substances  which  would  cut  off  gravity?  Up  to 
the  present  time  we  know  almost  nothing  about  this  most 
common  force.  What  little  we  do  know  about  gravita- 
tion was  discovered  and  announced  by  Sir  Isaac  Newton. 

Newton  also  spent  much  time  in  investigating  light. 
At  the  time  he  lived,  about  as  much  was  known  of  it 
as  is  now  known  about  gravitation.  Newton  asked  the 
question,  "  What  is  light?  "  "  How  fast  does  it  move?  " 
"  How  does  it  travel  from  one  point  to  another?  "  Al- 

78 


LIGHT  79 

though  Newton  made  the  first  observations  which  finally 
led  to  the  discovery  of  the  nature  of  light,  he  thought 
that  it  consisted  of  small  white  particles,  which  he  called 
corpuscles,  thrown  out  by  some  body,  such  as  the  sun, 
and  flying  through  space  until  some  of  them  came  in  con- 
tact with  the  eye  and  enabled  one  to  see. 

We  harness  Niagara  Falls  and  develop  electric  power  to 
light  and  turn  the  wheels  of  several  cities.  Coal  comes 
from  plants  which  lived  thousands  of  years  ago.  Plants 
will  grow  only  in  sunlight;  this  is  stored  up  energy,  and, 
whether  in  coal  or  in  water,  power  comes  from  the  sun. 
If  on  a  clear  day  a  surface  is  held  up  at  right  angles  to  the 
sun's  rays,  it  receives  about  two  and  one-half  horse-power 
per  square  yard.  How  is  all  this  energy  transmitted  from 
the  sun  to  the  earth?  It  is  now  known  that  there  are 
many  wave  motions  or  vibrations  transmitted  through  a 
medium  called  ether.  These  waves  vary,  from  exceedingly 
short  ones,  so  small  that  if  they  are  visible  it  would  take 
a  powerful  microscope  to  see  them,  up  to  a  mile  long. 
Sound  waves  are  longitudinal  while  these  are  transverse. 
Sound  waves  are  in  the  air  or  some  kind  of  matter,  while 
these  are  in  ether  only.  When  these  ether  vibrations  are 
of  such  length  that  they  will  be  detected  by  the  eye  they 
are  called  light.  Light  will  pass  through  a  perfect  vacuum 
while  sound  will  not,  showing  that  they  do  not  and  can  not 
travel  through  the  same  media.  Light  will  pass  through 
glass  not  as  a  vibration  of  the  glass  but  of  the  ether  which 
fills  the  spaces  among  the  molecules  of  glass. 

Until  the  time  of  Roemer,  only  a  hundred  years  before 
the  colonies  signed  the  Declaration  of  Independence,  the 
question  of  the  speed  of  light  was  not  answered.  Roemer 
was  observing  the  eclipse  of  one  of  the  moons  of  Jupiter. 
He  determined  the  time  it  took  the  moon  to  go  once  around 
Jupiter  and  computed  the  time  of  each  eclipse  for  a  year. 


80  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

Then  he  observed  that  the  eclipse  fell  behind  his  schedule 
and  this  continued  for  six  months  and  then  began  to  gain 
until  it  caught  up  to  his  computed  time  in  six  months. 

We  might  compare  this  to  a  fact  observed  on  Lake 
Michigan.  At  one  of  the  lighthouses  at  a  dangerous 
point  there  is  a  fog  whistle  which  is  blown  by  machinery 
once  each  minute.  Suppose  a  person  in  a  boat  at  this 
point  hears  the  whistle  blow  at  exactly  10  o'clock  and  then 
rows  directly  out  from  the  shore  two  miles  in  a  half  hour. 
Would  he  hear  the  whistle  at  10:30  o'clock?  Why  does 
he  hear  it  about  10  seconds  past  10:30?  What  does  this 


FIG.  52. 

Roemer  found  that  light  from  Jupiter  took  about  seventeen 
minutes  to  travel  from  a  to  6.  This  is  about  186,000  miles  per 
second.  The  fastest  railroad  train  would  require  for  the  same 
distance  about  350  years  if  it  ran  without  stop. 

10  seconds  represent?  Now  he  rows  back  to  shore  in 
another  half  hour  and  hears  the  whistle  at  11  o'clock. 
Why  did  it  first  lose  and  then  gain  on  its  schedule  of  blow- 
ing each  minute? 

In  Fig.  52  the  earth  was  at  (a)  when  Roemer  made  his  first 
computations,  and  when  the  earth  was  at  (6),  six  months 
later,  the  eclipses  were  about  1000  seconds  slow.  He 
reasoned,  therefore,  that  it  took  light  1000  seconds  longer 
to  travel  from  Jupiter  to  (b)  than  from  Jupiter  to  (a)  as 
the  distance  from  the  earth  to  the  sun  is  93,000,000  miles, 
the  distance  from  (a)  to  (6)  is  186,000,000  miles,  which 


LIGHT  81 

gives  a  velocity  of  186,000  miles  per  second  for  light.  It  is 
now  possible  to  measure  the  velocity  of  light  by  several 
other  methods  and  results  agree  quite  closely  with  the 
above  value.  It  is  found  that  in  such  substances  as  glass 
the  velocity  is  slower  than  in  space. 

This  velocity  is  so  great  that  it  is  difficult  to  realize  it. 
Light  travels  a  distance  equal  to  a  little  more  than  seven 
times  around  the  world  at  the  equator  in  one  second.  If  a 
race  were  to  take  place  between  a  wave  of  light  and  the  far- 
famed  20th  Century  Limited  train,  the  " Limited"  might 
have  a  start  of  one  year  of  twelve  months  on  a  straight 
way  without  a  stop,  and  then  the  ray  of  light  could  catch 
the  train  in  a  little  less  than  three  seconds. 

When  a  piece  of  iron  is  placed  in  the  forge  and  heated, 
its  molecules  soon  become  so  disturbed  that  they  start 
vibrations  in  the  ether.  When  these  vibrations  are  of 
high  frequency  the  iron  is  incandescent  and  emits  light. 
This  process  of  sending  out  waves  of  ether  is  radiation  and 
may  be  either  heat  or  light  waves.  The  usual  source  of 
light  waves  is  some  substance  heated  to  incandescence. 
The  glowworm  and  the  firefly  in  some  way  yet  unknown  to 
man  are  able  to  emit  light  without  heat. 

When  light  is  traveling  out  from  any  source,  the  wave 
front  if  undisturbed  is  spherical.  A  beam  of  light  is  the 
path  from  a  point  of  the  source  to  some  other  point  and 
consists  of  a  series  of  small  elements  of  the  successive  waves. 
This  line  of  travel,  if  the  medium  is  alike  all  the  way,  is  a 
straight  line.  If  it  were  not,  one  could  not  sight  a  gun  and 
the  surveyor  could  not  run  a  line  with  the  transit. 

Since  light  travels  in  straight  lines,  it  is  evident  that  if 
light  be  radiating  from  a  point,  and  some  object  is  placed 
so  that  it  stops  part  of  the  rays,  the  space  behind  the  object 
will  be  without  light  from  the  given  source. 

This  space  from  which  light  is  excluded  is  called  a  shadow. 
7 


82 


APPLIED   PHYSICS 


If  a  screen  be  held  up  behind  the  object  a  cross  section  of 
the  shadow  will  be  obtained,  which  is  often  incorrectly 
called  a  shadow. 

Fig.  53  and  54  show  the  difference  between  the  shadow 
formed  when  the  light  is  from  a  point  and  when  it  is  from 

an  object  with  a  consider- 
able size.  Fig.  54  shows 
the  position  of  the  sun, 
earth,  and  moon,  so  that 
the  moon  will  pass  through 
the  shadow  of  the  earth 
and  be  eclipsed. 

The   experience   of    the 
race  has  taught  us  to  be- 
lieve that  under  ordinary 
conditions  light  travels  in  straight  lines. 

Note.  Attention  should  be  called  to  the  fact  that  this 
statement  is  only  approximately  true.  If  the  student 
takes  an  advanced  course  in  physics,  he  will  find  that 
because  of  the  short  wave-length  of  light,  the  statement, 
that  light  travels  in  straight  lines  in  a  uniform  medium, 


FIG.  53. 

Shadow  when  the  light  is  from  a 
point. 


FIG.  54. 
Shadow  when  the  light  is  from  a  large  surface. 

is  satisfactory  for  a  high  school  course  in  physics.  Let  the 
student  look  through  a  thin  fine  cloth  toward  a  bright  light, 
or  let  him  put  a  thumb  mark  on  polished  brass  and  look 
in  it  at  the  reflection  of  a  bright  light.  The  students  who 
are  especially  interested  might  then  be  referred  to  Prestons' 
"Theory  of  Light." 


LIGHT 


83 


When  light  radiating  from  a  point  is  received  by  the 
eye,  we  at  once  assume  that  the  object  from  which  it  comes 
is  at  that  point.  As  a  result  of  this,  the  eye  is  often  deceived. 
If  light  from  an  object  in  front  of  a  plane  mirror  strikes 
the  mirror,  it  is  reflected  so  that  the  angle  of  incidence 
equals  the  angle  of  reflection.  Angle  of  incidence  is  the 
angle  between  the  ray  of  light  striking  the  mirror  and  the 
line  perpendicular  to  the  mirror  at  the  point  of  incidence. 
The  angle  between  the  same  perpendicular  and  the  re- 
flected ray  is  called  the  angle  of  reflection.  This  causes 
the  light  to  appear  to  be  diverging  from  a  point  or  object 
as  far  back  of  the  mirror  as  the  object  is  in  front,  as  in 
Fig.  55.  This  may  be 
proved  both  mathe- 
matically and  experi- 
mentally. The  image 
formed  in  a  plane  mir- 
ror is  a  virtual  image, 
as  no  rays  of  light  actu- 
ally converge  at  the 
point  where  the  image 

appears  to  be,  but  only        Looking  in  a  good  plane  mirror  the 

eye  is  deceived.     An  image  appears  to 
be  back  of  the  mirror  as  far  as  the  object 


Image 


FIG.  55. 


appear  to  do  so.     If  a 

person  stands  before  a    js  m  front 

plane  mirror,  the  image 

is  as  far  back  of  the  mirror  as  the  object  is  in  front,  and 

is  virtual. 

Intensity  of  illumination  is  defined  as  the  quantity  of 
light  energy  per  unit  area.  Even  a  child  knows  that  to  get 
more  light  on  its  page  the  book  is  brought  nearer  the  source 
of  light.  This  may  be  studied  quantitatively  as  follows: 
suppose  a  light  be  placed  at  the  center  of  a  hollow  sphere, 
the  energy  sent  out  is  distributed  over  the  inner  surface 
of  the  sphere;  if  it  is  placed  at  the  center  of  a  sphere 


84 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


.with  twice  as  great  a  diameter,  the  same  energy  is  spread 
over  the  surface  four  times  as  large,  since  the  surface  of 
the  sphere  varies  as  the  square  of  the  diameter. 

In  Fig.  56,  suppose  a  screen  be  held  at  a  distance  of  one 
foot  from  a  source  of  light,  and  a  square,  one  inch  on  the 
edge,  be  cut  out.  If  a  screen  be  held  up  parallel  to  the  first, 
and  two  feet  from  the  source  of  light,  the  energy  which 
was  received  on  the  square  of  card  cut  out  now  passes 
through  the  hole  and  is  spread  over  a  surface  four  times 
as  large  as  the  opening  in  the  first  card.  One  ounce  of 
butter  will  be  four  times  as  thick  spread  on  one  slice 
of  bread  as  it  will  be  if  spread  over  four  slices  of  bread  of 
the  same  size.  We  are  now  ready  to  state  the  law  that  the 


FIG.  56. 

At  two  feet  a  giyen  amount  of  light  covers  four  times  as 
much  surface  as  at  one  foot. 


intensity  of  illumination  varies  inversely  as  the  square  of  the 
distance  from  the  source  of  light.  Ten  feet  from  a  given 
lamp  the  illumination  is  1/100  as  intense  as  it  would  be 
one  foot  from  the  same  lamp.  If  two  sources  of  light  are 
to  be  compared,  they  are  placed  so  that  they  shine  on  oppo- 
site sides  of  a  card,  and  the  card  so  adjusted  that  the  in- 
tensity of  illumination  is  the  same  on  both  sides.  Then  we 
may  state  that  the  intensities  of  two  sources  of  light  are 
directly  proportional  to  the  squares  of  the  distance  at 
which  they  give  equal  illumination.  To  measure  the 
power  of  any  light  some  unit  must  be  used.  The  one  most 


LIGHT  85 

commonly  used  is  a  sperm  candle  weighing  £  pound  and 
burning  at  the  rate  of  120  grains  per  hour.  This  is  called 
one  candle-power,  and  when  we  say  that  a  light  is  60  candle- 
power,  we  mean  that  it  emits  as  much  light  as  60  standard 
candles.  In  making  the  measurement,  a  paper  screen  is 
used  with  a  grease  spot  near  its  center.  If  light  shines 
on  only  one  side  of  the  paper  the  spot  will  be  dark  on  the 
one  side  and  bright  on  the  other.  If  the  card  be  equally 
illuminated  on  both  sides  the  spot  will  almost  disappear. 
Sometimes  two  mirrors  are  used  in  order  to  see  both  sides 
at  the  same  time.  In  measuring  a  certain  light  a  standard 
candle  is  placed  on  one  side  of  the  screen  and  the  light  to 
be  measured  on  the  other.  It  is  found  that  when  the  card 
is  equally  illuminated  on  both  sides,  the  candle  is  15  inches 
from  the  screen  and  the  other  light  is  60  inches  from  the 
screen.  Then  to  compute  the  candle-power  we  have,  by 
the  law  of  intensity, 

1       152      _!_ 

x  ~  602  °r  16 

From  which  x  =  16  candle-power. 

The  reflection  of  light  in  a  plane  mirror  has  already  been 
discussed.  Reflection  of  light  from  a  rough  surface  fol- 
lows the  same  law,  but  owing  to  the  large  number  of  small 
surfaces,  the  light  is  sent  out  in  all  directions  and  is  called 
diffused  light.  It  is  by  means  of  diffused  light  that  we  see 
objects. 

It  has  been  found  by  experiment  and  measurement  that 
the  velocity  of  light  is  less  in -glass,  water,  diamonds,  etc., 
than  it  is  in  air,  and  that  it  is  a  little  less  in  air  than  in  a 
space  free  from  air.  Such  substances  are  called  optically 
dense.  It  is  supposed  that  ether  pervades  these  substances 
but  that  the  molecules  of  the  substances  interfere  with  the 
speed  of  the  ether  vibrations.  A  substance  like  glass,  which 


86 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


will  let  them  through,  is  called  transparent,  while  a  sub- 
stance such  as  iron,  which  will  stop  them,  is  opaque;  and 
one  which  will  let  part  of  the  rays  through  but  diffuse 
them  so  that  the  object  cannot  be  seen,  such  as  frosted 
glass,  is  translucent.  If  a  series  of  wave  fronts,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  57,  not  perpendicular  to  the  surface,  enters  a  piece 
of  glass,  one  side  of  a  wave  front  (a)  will  enter  the  glass 
before  the  side  (c)  reaches  it,  and  it  will  be  retarded  so 


FIG.  57. 

When  light  passes  from  one  medium  to  another  it  is  bent  or  refracted 
at  the  surface. 

that  (c)  will  run  around  it,  and  the  direction  of  the  wave 
will  be  changed  and  its  path  through  the  glass  is  a  new 
straight  line.  When  the  wave  reaches  the  other  side  of 
the.  plate  and  is  about  to  emerge  from  the  glass  the  side 
(6)  gets  out  first,  and  on  account  of  its  greater  velocity 
runs  ahead  of  (d),  so  that  the  direction  of  the  ray  of  light 
is  changed  again  and  takes  another  straight  line.  If  the 
two  surfaces  of  the  glass  are  parallel,  the  change  in  veloc- 
ity and  therefore  the  change  in  direction  of  the  ray  of 


LIGHT  87 

light  is  the  same  at  each  side  and  the  emergent  ray  is 
parallel  to  the  entrant  ray.  The  angle  x  between  the 
ray  and  the  perpendicular  is  the  angle  of  incidence,  the 
angle  y  between  the  ray  and  the  perpendicular  is  the  angle 
of  refraction.  The  change  in  direction  of  light  rays  at 
the  surface  of  a  substance  is  refraction. 

This  refraction  leads  to  many  familiar  deceptions  of  the 
eye.  A  stick  thrust  into  clear  water  appears  bent  at  the 
surface.  Objects  under  water  seem  to  be  lifted  toward 
the  surface.  When  in  bathing,  your  feet  seem  to  be  nearer 
to  you  than  they  are.  The  bottom  of  the  lake  seems  to 
run  out  level,  but  when  you  wade  out  it  becomes  deeper. 

The  veolcity  of  a  light  is  always  the  same  in  a  given 
substance  and  the  refraction  of  light  depends  upon  the 
velocity,  that  also  may  be  measured.  When  light  passes 
from  a  vacuum  into  a  substance,  an  examination  of  Fig.  57 
will  show  that  the  angle  of  incidence  is  greater  than  the 
angle  of  refraction ;  (x  is  greater  than  y)  when  light  passes 
from  a  vacuum  into  a  substance.  The  sine  of  the  angle  of 
incidence  divided  by  the  sine  of  the  angle  of  refraction  is 
the  absolute  index  of  refraction.  When  light  passes  from 
one  medium  to  another,  the  sine  of  the  angle  of  inci- 
dence divided  by  the  sine  of  the  angle  of  refraction  is  the 
relative  index  of  refraction.  This  is  usually  written 

sin  i 

: —    U 

sin  r 

In  general,  when  light  passes  from  a  rarer  to  a  denser 
medium,  it  is  bent  toward  the  perpendicular.  When  it 
passes  from  a  denser  to  a  rarer  medium  it  is  bent  from  the 
perpendicular. 

The  index  of  refraction  for  a  few  substances  is  as  follows : 
Water  1.33,  Crown  glass  1.52,  Flint  glass  about  1.62, 
Diamond  2.47. 


88 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


In  Fig.  58  a  ray  of  light  is  incident  at  (o),  coming  from  a 
dense  medium  to  a  rarer.  In  that  case  (r)  is  larger  than  (i) 
and  as  the  incident  ray  swings  toward  (a1)  the  refracted 
ray  will  move  toward  the  surface  and  (r)  becomes  90°.  If 
the  incident  ray  x  moves  farther  toward  the  surface,  as  at 
(a1),  the  refracted  ray  cannot  follow  the  law  of  refraction 
any  farther  and  is  then  all  reflected  from  the  surface  as 

from  the  plane  mirror  and  is 
said  to  be  totally  reflected. 
The  angle  of  incidence,  when 
the  angle  of  refraction  is  90°, 
is  the  critical  angle.  When 
the  critical  angle  is  passed 
the  ray  is  totally  reflected; 
such  a  reflecting  surface  is 
the  best  reflector  known. 
The  sparkle  and  glow  of  the 
diamond  is  largely  due  to 
the  fact  that  its  index  of  refraction  is  large,  and  therefore 
light  soon  passes  the  critical  angle  and  is  totally  reflected. 
If  white  light  be  passed  through  a  glass  prism,  as  in  Fig. 
59,  it  is  twice  refracted  in  the  same  direction,  and,  besides 
its  deviation  from  the  origi- 
nal direction,  it  is  found  to 
be  dispersed,  that  is,  sep- 
arated into  different  colors. 
These  colors  correspond  to 
light  of  different  wave- 
lengths, much  as  pitch  in 
sound  depend  upon  differ- 
ent wave-lengths.  The  red, 
which  is  least  refracted,  is 
the  longest,  about  .000081 
cm. ;  the  violet,  which  is  the  most  refracted,  is  the  shortest 


FIG.  58. 


FIG.  59. 

White  light  passed  through  a 
prism  is  twice  refracted  in  the  same 
direction  and  is  separated  (dis- 
persed) into  the  colors  of  the  rain- 


LIGHT 


89 


or  .000033  cm.  It  is  customary  to  speak  of  seven  colors 
in  the  solar  spectrum  —  red,  orange,  yellow,  green,  blue, 
indigo,  violet.  It  is  now  known  that  these  seven  may  be 
made  by  properly  combining  red,  green,  and  violet.  The 
primary  colors  then  are  red,  green,  and  violet.  Between 
the  extremes  there  are  thousands  of  wave-lengths  which 
cause  these  colors  to  shade  into  each  other  in  an  endless 
number  of  shades.  The  color  of  light  then  depends  upon 
its  wave-length,  while  the  color  of  a  body  depends  upon 
the  color  of  light  it  reflects.  If  a  body  reflects  only  red 
and  absorbs  all  other  colors  it  is  red.  A  piece  of  glass  so 
colored  that  it  will  only  transmit  blue  light  is  blue.  Some 
artificial  lights  are  lacking  in  one  or  more  colors.  When 
this  is  the  case,  objects  will  not  appear  to  be  their  cor- 
rect colors  under  these  lights.  For  instance,  the  mercury 
vapor  arc  has  no  red  in  its  light.  If  you  will  go  to  the 
engine  room  in  the  evening  and  stand  under  the  mercury 
vapor  arc  you  will  see  a  peculiar  change.  The  lips  are 
red  and  hence  reflect  only  red  light;  there  is  no  red  in 
this  light  and  hence  the  lips  reflect  no  light  at  all  and 
appear  black. 

In  Fig.  59  the  ray  of  light  is  twice  bent  toward  the  base 
or  thicker  side  of  the  prism.  If  two  such  prisms  are  placed 
base  to  base  and  then 
ground  until  each  face  is 
part  of  the  surface  of  a 
sphere,  a  double  convex 
lens  would  be  produced, 
and  rays  striking  the  sur- 
face would  be  twice  bent 
toward  the  center  and 
brought  to  a  point.  If 
parallel  rays  strike  the 
lens,  as  in  Fig.  60,  the  point  F,  at  which  they  focus,  is  the 


FIG.  60. 

Parallel  rays  of  light  brought  to  a 
point  (focus)  F,  by  means  of  a  con- 
vex lens.  The  burning  glass  is  an 
example. 


90  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

principal  focus;  0  is  the  optical  center;  OF  is  the  axis  and 
OF  is  the  focal  length  (/.) 

In  the  back  of  the  eye  there  is  a  layer  of  rods  and  cones 
each  forming  an  end  of  a  fiber  of  the  optic  nerve.  It  is 
supposed  that  these  are  of  three  kinds,  one  set  responding 
to  red  light,  one  to  green  and  one  to  violet  light.  If  all 
are  stimulated  at  once  the  effect  is  that  of  white  light.  If 
a  proper  mixture  of  the  red  ones  and  the  violet  ones  is  stim- 
ulated, the  sensation  given  to  the  brain  is  that  of  a  yellow 
light.  The  most  common  form  of  color-blindness  is  called 
red-blind.  It  is  probably  because  the  red  rods  and  cones 
are 'either  defective  or  inactive.  They  cannot  distinguish 
red  from  the  other  colors. 

A  beautiful  effect  produced  by  separating  white  light 
into  its  colors  is  seen  in  the  rainbow,  when  the  sun  is 
shining  low  in  the  heavens  on  one  side  and  rain  is  falling 
on  the  opposite  side;  the  light  entering  the  drops  of  water 
is  reflected  to  the  eye  from  the  back  side  of  the  sphere, 
and  is  refracted  at  the  surface  so  that  the  colors  are  sepa- 
rated. Standing  at  the  brink  of  Niagara  one  may  often 
see  the  complete  circle  in  the  mist. 

When  light  is   twice  refracted   in  the   same   direction 
through  a  prism  or  a  lens,  the  light  is  bent  from  a  straight 
line  and  also   separated  into   colors.     A 
convex  lens  will  focus  the  light  from  an 
object,  but  the  colors  will  focus  at  differ- 
ent  points   and   the   image  will   not   be 
FIG.  61.  sharp.     When   the   red    is   in   the   focus 

T  ,       ,   every   object   will    be   surrounded   by   a 

Lens    made    of  ^          J 

two  kinds  of  glass,  band  of  rainbow  colors.  This  is  called 
tojocus  all  colors  chromatic  aberration  and  would  be  unde- 
sirable in  a  camera.  Photographs  of 
most  of  our  neighbors  would  not  look  natural  if  each  had 
his  head  surrounded  by  a  halo.  It  is  found  that  crown 


LIGHT  91 

and  flint  glass,  having  the  same  dispersive  power,  do  not 
have  the  same  refractive  power.  A  lens  built  up  of  two 
kinds  of  glass  in  the  proper  proportions  will  focus  all  colors 
alike  and  is  called  achromatic  (without  color).  A  section 
of  such  a  lens  is  shown  in  Fig.  61. 

APPLICATION  OF  LENSES  TO  OPTICAL  INSTRUMENTS 

The  eye  (Fig.  62)  is  a  small  camera.     A  ball  about  one 
inch  in  diameter  has  an  opening  in  front  at  which  the  crys- 


Colored 
Diaphram 


Cornea 


FIG.  62. 
Section  of  the  human  eye. 

talline  lens  is  placed,  and  a  sensitive  coat  composed  of  nerve 
endings  at  the  back,  upon  which  the  real  image  is  formed. 
An  object  in  front  of  the  eye  reflects  light,  which  enters 
through  the  pupil  of  the  eye  and  is  focused  in  a  real,  in- 
verted image  on  the  retina  by  the  crystalline  lens.  The 
distance  from  the  front  to  the  back  of  the  eye  cannot  be 
changed,  so  when  objects  are  at  different  distances  the 
accommodation  is  made  by  changing  the  curvature  of  the 
lens  by  means  of  the  muscle  surrounding  it.  When  the 
eyeball  becomes  too  long,  so  that  the  image  is  formed  before 
reaching  the  retina,  only  near  objects  can  be  seen  dis- 


92 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


tinctly,  and  distant  objects  are  blurred.  Such  an  eye  is 
near-sighted  (myopic) .  The  defect  is  corrected  by  concave 
glasses. 

In  the  laboratory  five  possible  positions  were  found  for 
the  convex  lens. 

1.  When  the  object  is  beyond  2/,  the  image  is  real, 
inverted,  smaller.  This  is  the  position  used  in  the  camera 
for  taking  all  ordinary  pictures.  See  Fig.  63. 


FIG.  63. 


2.  When  the  object  is  between  /  and  2/  the  image  is 
beyond  2/,  real,  inverted,  and  larger  than  the  object.  This 
is  the  position  used  in  the  projection  lantern.  The  slide 
is  placed  in  the  lantern  at  a  distance  a  little  greater  than 
If,  the  image  being  formed  on  the  screen  enlarged  and 
inverted,  as  in  Fig.  64. 


FIG.  64.  —  Projection  lantern  or  moving-picture  machine. 

In.  front  of  a  powerful  light  a  lens,  as  in  setting  4,  throws  almost 
parallel  rays  through  the  slide  or  film.  A  convex  lens  in  position  2  is 
then  used  to  form  a  large  image  upon  the  screen.  If  sixteen  or  more 
per  second  are  thrown  on  the  screen  the  impression  of  one  upon  the  eye 
lasts  until  the  next  is  presented  and  the  result  appears  to  be  a  continu- 
ous moving  picture. 


LIGHT 


93 


3.  When  the  object  is  at  2/  the  image. is  at  2/,  inverted 
and  real.     This  is  the  position  used  in  taking  a  life-sized 
picture  with  the  camera. 

4.  When  the  object  is  at  /,  the  rays  diverging  from  it 
upon  the  lens  leave  the  lens  in  a  parallel  beam  of  light. 
This  is  used  in  the  dark  lantern  to  throw  a  strong  beam  of 


FIG.  65.  —  Compound  Microscope. 

A  mirror  reflects  light  upward  through  the  semi-transparent  object 
Oi.  A  convex  lens  converges  the  rays  of  light  toward  Oz,  but  another 
convex  lens  in  the  eyepiece  converges  them  to  a  real  image  03.  A 
convex  lens  is  used  as  a  simple  microscope  to  cause  the  rays  of  light 
coming  from  this  image  to  appear  to  come  from  the  targe  virtual 
image  04. 


94 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


light  to  a  considerable  distance  by  placing  the  light  at  /. 
The  same  setting  is  used  in  the  condensing  lens  of  the  pro- 
jection lantern  to  throw  a  strong  light  upon  the  slide. 

5.  When  the  object  is  between  /  and  the  lens  no  real 
image  is  formed,  but  by  looking  through  the  lens  a  virtual, 
enlarged  image  is  seen.  This  is  used  in  the  simple  micro- 
scope and  in  the  reading  glass,  or  the  eyepiece  in  a  tele- 
scope, as  lens  6,  Fig.  66. 


FIG.  66.  —  Telescope. 

The  telescope  uses  a  convex  lens  for  the  object  glass  and  forms  a 
real  inverted  image,  just  as  the  camera  does.  This  is  sometimes 
reinverted  by  a  second  convex  lens  and  then  seen  through  a  simple 
microscope. 

The  compound  microscope  is  composed  of  two  parts: 
a  convex  lens,  set  as  in  a  projection  lantern,  forms  an  en- 
larged real  image  in  the  barrel  of  the  microscope.  The 
eyepiece  is  a  simple  microscope  used  to  enlarge  this  image 
again. 


FIG.  67.  —  Opera  Glass. 

In  the  opera  glass  a  convex  lens  deflects  the  rays  of  light  toward 
an  image  (6).  A  concave  lens  is  interposed  so  that  the  rays  do  not 
focus  but  a'ppear  to  the  eye  to  come  from  point  (&')•  The  result  is 
to  bring  the  object  apparently  near  without  inverting  it. 


LIGHT 


95 


FIG.  68.  FIG.  69. 

Optical  disk,  showing  reflection  of  light  in  mirrors. 

When  light  is  reflected  by  a  plane  mirror  the  angle  of 
incidence  is  equal  to  the  angle  of  reflection  and  right  and 
left  are  reversed.  (Figs.  68  and  69.) 


FiG   70.  FIG.  71. 

Optical  disk,  showing  reflection  of  light  in  mirrors. 

The  concave  mirror  focuses  parallel  rays  at  a  point  called 
the  principle  focus  (Fig.  70).  The  convex  mirror  tends  to 
diverge  light  reflected  from  its  surface  (Fig.  71). 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


FIG.  72.  FIG.  73. 

Optical  disk,  showing  effect  of  refraction  of  light. 

Light  passing  from  air  to  glass  is  partly  reflected  and 
partly  refracted  toward  the  perpendicular  (Fig.  72).  Light 
passing  from  glass  to  air  is  bent  from  the  perpendicular 
(Fig.  73). 


FIG.  74.  FIG.  75. 

Optical  disk,  showing  effect  of  refraction  of  light. 

Rays  of  light  parallel  to  the  principle  axis  of  a  convex 
lens  meet  at  the  principle  focus  (Fig.  74).  Rays  of  light 
diverging  from  a  distance  equal  to  the  focal  length  upon  a 
convex  lens,  leave  as  parallel  rays  (Fig.  75). 


LIGHT 


97 


FIG.  76.  FIG.  77. 

Optical  disk,  showing  reflection  and  refraction  of  light. 

The  concave  lens  tends  to  diverge  light  passing  through 
it  (Fig.  76).  Fig.  77  shows  how  light  passes  through  the 
drop  of  rain  when  a  rainbow  is  formed. 


FIG.  78.  FIG.  79. 

Optical  disk,  showing  reflection  and  refraction  of  light. 

The  total  reflection  or  right  angle  prism  is  often  used  in 
optical  instruments.  The  light  strikes  at  greater  than  the 
critical  angle  (Fig.  78). 

A  semi-circular  tank  of  glass  may  be  used  to  show  the 
refraction  of  light  at  the  surface  of  a  liquid. 
8 


CHAPTER  VII 
HEAT 

ALL  scientists  agree  that  heat  is  a  form  of  energy.  It  is 
supposed  to  be  motion  of  the  molecules  composing  mat- 
ter. The  molecules  according  to  the  general  accepted 
theory  are  not  in  a  state  of  rest  but  are  moving  and  vibrat- 
ing back  and  forth,  some  slowly,  some  rapidly.  If  the 
motion  is  slow  the  body  feels  cold,  if  the  motion  is  rapid 
the  body  feels  warm.  Due  to  its  inertia  any  body  in  mo- 
tion possesses  energy,  hence  it  is  considered  that  heat  is 
a  form  of  kinetic  energy.  Heat  may  be  readily  transformed 
into  vibration  of  ether,  like  light  vibrations,  except  that 
the  waves  are  longer,  when  it  behaves,  in  most  respects, 
exactly  as  light  waves  do.  It  is  in  this  form  that  heat 
travels  from  the  sun  to  the  earth.  Radiant  heat  may  be 
changed  back  to  molecular  vibrations  when  it  becomes 
kinetic  energy. 

The  term  temperature  is  used  to  indicate  that  a  body  is 
hot  or  cold.  It  indicates  whether  the  molecules  of  the 
body  have  a  high  speed  or  a  low  speed.  A  hot  body  has  a 
high  temperature  while  a  cold  body  has  a  low  temperature. 
When  a  body  receives  heat  from  any  source,  its  temperature 
rises;  when  it  loses  heat  its  temperature  falls.  It  is  a 
common  mistake  to  suppose  that  temperature  is  a  measure 
of  the  quantity  of  heat  a  body  possesses. 

A  teapot  full  of  water  may  have  the  same  temperature 
as  the  water  in  Lake  Erie,  yet  the  quantity  of  heat  in  Lake 
Erie  is  much  greater  than  the  quantity  of  heat  in  the  tea- 

98 


HEAT 


99 


Boiling        212C 
Point-H2O 


_1QO 


pot  full  of  water.  If  the  teapot  is  heated  to  the  boiling 
temperature,  its  quantity  of  heat  is  increased,  but  the 
total  quantity  of  heat  energy  it  possesses  is  much  less  than 
the  quantity  of  heat  energy  possessed  by  the  lake  at  a 
lower  temperature. 

The  method  of  measuring  temperature  and  of  measuring 
the  quantity  of  heat  present  in  a  body  are  very  different. 
For  measuring  temperature  the  ther- 
mometer is  generally  used.  A  long, 
thin,  glass  tube  with  a  bulb  at  one 
end  is  partly  filled  with  mercury. 
The  space  above  the  mercury  must 
contain  no  air.  If  the  mercury  is 
heated  it  expands  in  proportion  to 
the  change  in  temperature.  In  the 
Fahrenheit  scale,  the  one  generally 
used  in  this  country,  the  point  where 
the  mercury  stands  when  the  bulb  is 
surrounded  by  melting  ice  is  marked 
32°.  The  point  where  the  mercury 
stands  when  placed  in  steam  over  boil- 
ing water  under  the  pressure  of  air 
at  sea-level  is  marked  212°.  The  space 
between  them  is  then  divided  into  180 
equal  parts.  The  centigrade  scale  has 
the  same  two  fixed  points  marked  0° 
and  100°  respectively  and  the  space 
between  divided  into  100  equal 
spaces.  If  these  two  scales  be 
placed  side  by  side,  as  in  Fig.  80,  it 
is  evident  that  0°  C.  is  the  same  as 
32°  F.  and  that  100*  C.  is  the 
same  as  212°  F.,  also  that  180°  F. 
covers  the  same  space  as  100°  C.  Therefore  1°  F.  is  the 


. 

Sg 

I 


FIG.  80. 


100  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

same  as  f  °  C.  To  change  20°  C.  to  Fahrenheit,  20  X  I  = 
36°  F.  above  the  freezing  point.  36°  +  32°  =  78°  F.  All 
changes  must  be  computed  above  the  freezing  point.  To 
change  104°  F.  to  C.,  104°  -  32°  =  72°  F.  above  freezing 
point.  72  X  I  =•  40°  C. 

Heat  cannot  be  measured  in  pounds  or  quarts  as  sub- 
stances are,  but  must  be  measured  by  the  effect  it  pro- 
duces. It  is  found  that  the  quantity  of  heat  required  to  raise 
the  temperature  of  one  unit  of  water  one  degree  is  almost 
the  same  at  any  point  between  the  freezing  and  boiling 
points,  that  is,  it  takes  almost  the  same  quantity  of 
heat  to  raise  the  temperature  of  one  gram  of  water  from 
2°  C.to  3°  C.  that  is  required  to  raise  the  temperature  from 
75°  to  76°  C.  Therefore  the  quantity  of  heat  required 
to  raise  one  gram  of  water  1°  C.  is  taken  as  the  metric 
unit  of  heat  and  is  called  the  calory.  This  unit  is  very 
small.  When  a  large  quantity  of  heat  is  to  be  measured  a 
larger  unit,  known  as  a  great  calory  or  kilogram  calory,  is 
used.  This  is  the  quantity  of  heat  required  to  raise  the 
temperature  of  one  kilogram  of  water  1°  C.  It  is  equal  to 
1000  gram  calories  and  is  approximately  equal  to  4  B.T.U.'s. 
In  the  English  system  the  quantity  of  heat  required  to 
raise  the  temperature  of  one  pound  of  water  1°  F.  is 
taken  as  the  unit  and  is  called  one  British  Thermal  Unit. 
(B.T.U.) 

Suppose  we  take  a  vessel  partly  filled  with  water  at  the 
freezing  temperature.  If  the  vessel  be  placed  on  the  stove, 
and  heat  applied,  the  millions  of  molecules  at  first  moving 
slowly  will  begin  to  move  faster  as  the  heat  is  transferred 
to  them.  Their  kinetic  energy  increases  and  the  tem- 
perature rises.  After  reaching  a  certain  temperature 
the  molecules,  in  addition  to  their  rapid  movement,  also 
move  farther  apart  and  their  paths  are  longer  between 
bumps.  As  the  molecules  move  farther  apart,  the  space 


HEAT  101 

occupied  by  the  water  becomes  larger  and  the  body 
expands. 

If  we  take  a  block  of  ice  at  a  temperature  of  —  10°  C. 
and  apply  heat  while  a  thermometer  is  in  contact  with  it,  we 
will  find  that  the  temperature  rises  until  the  thermometer 
stands  at  0°  C.  and  will  then  become  stationary.  '  As  soon 
as  this  temperature  is  reached,  the  ice  begins  to  melt  and 
the  heat  applied  instead  of  raising  the  temperature  is  all 
used  up  to  produce  the  change  of  state  from  solid  to  liquid. 
The  temperature  of  the  liquid  will  remain  at  0°  until  the 
ice  is  all  melted.  If  more  heat  is  now  applied  to  the  water 
its  temperature  will  gradually  rise,  until,  if  it  is  in  an  open 
vessel  at  sea  level,  its  temperature  reaches  100°  C.  No 
matter  how  much  heat  is  applied  to  the  water  the  reading 
of  the  thermometer  will  remain  stationary  at  100°  C.  and 
cannot  be  made  to  rise  higher.  The  molecules  have  been 
set  into  such  rapid  motion  that  the  attractive  forces  can 
no  longer  hold  them  and  they  tend  to  separate.  The 
liquid  changes  to  a  gas,  that  is,  steam,  and  the  heat  is 
being  used  to  produce  this  change. 

The  heat  that  is  used  in  changing  a  solid  to  a  liquid  or  a 
liquid  to  a  gas  is  called  latent  heat.  The  portion  of  heat 
that  produces  change  in  temperature  may  be  detected  by 
the  sense  of  feeling  and  is  therefore  called  sensible  heat. 
Changes  in  volume  have  also  been  taking  place  in  the 
water.  While  the  ice  is  being  heated  from  -10°  to  0°  the 
ice  expands  slowly.  At  the  point  of  melting,  the  water 
at  0°  occupies  about  f  the  volume  of  the  ice  at  0°.  The 
water  contracts  until  it  reaches  4°  C.,  after  which  it  expands 
almost  uniformly  until  it  reaches  100°.  Nearly  all  sub- 
stances expand  as  heat  is  applied  to  them. 

We  have  noted  the  following  effects  produced  by  heat : 

1.  It  increases  the  rate  of  motion  of  the  molecules  as 
indicated  by  the  rise  of  temperature. 


102  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

2.  It  increases  the  length  of  the  paths  and  the  distance 
between  the  molecules,  causing  the  body  to  expand  and 
occupy  more  space. 

3.  It  overcomes  the  force  of  cohesion,  changes  the  state 
of  a  matter  from  a  solid  to  a  liquid  and  from  a  liquid  to  a  gas. 

The  heat  used  in  changing  a  solid  to  a  liquid  is  called 
the  latent  heat  of  fusion.  It  has  been  found  by  experi- 
ment that  to  change  one  gram  of  ice  at  0°  C.  to  water  at 
the  same  temperature,  requires  80  calories.  Hence  we 
say  that  latent  heat  of  fusion  of  ice  is  80.  Expressed  in 
the  English  system  the  latent  heat  is  144  B.T.U.,  which 
means  that  144  B.T.U.  are  required  to  change  one  pound  of 
ice  to  water  without  changing  its  temperature. 

The  latent  heat  of  steam  is  the  heat  required  to  change 
water  to  steam  without  changing  its  temperature.  In  the 
metric  system  this  is  537,  that  is,  to  change  one  gram  of 
water  to  steam  at  atmospheric  pressure  requires  537 
calories.  To  change  one  pound  of  water  to  steam  at 
212°  F.  takes  966  B.T.U. ;  in  other  words,  to  change  one 
pound  of  boiling  water  to  steam  at  212°  F.  requires  966 
times  as  much  heat  as  is  needed  to  heat  one  pound  of 
water  from  62°  to  63°  F. 

You  perhaps  have  never  considered  the  process  of  freez- 
ing as  a  heat  producing  process,  but  it  is.  When  one  pound 
of  Lake  Erie  water  freezes,  the  144  B.T.U.  it  contained  as 
latent  heat  are  given  out  to  the  air  and  help  to  keep  the 
temperature  of  Cleveland  mild  in  winter.  This  same  pound 
of  ice  placed  in  your  refrigerator  must  take  in  144  B.T.U. 
in  order  to  melt,  and  takes  it  from  the  surrounding  sub- 
stances and  cools  the  meat  and  butter.  The  same  ice 
may  be  packed  around  a  can  containing  cream.  Salt 
mixed  with  the  ice  will  cause  it  to  melt  and  it  must  have 
its  latent  heat  from  somewhere ;  so  it  takes  it  from  the  cream 
and  you  have  ice  cream  for  dinner. 


HEAT  103 

The  calory  has  been  defined  as  the  quantity  of  heat 
required  to  warm  1  gram  of  water  1°  C.  If  we  warm  one 
gram  of  brass  1°  C.,  it  will  not  require  as  much  heat. 
Suppose  we  take  two  vessels  exactly  alike,  each  containing 
the  same  amount  of  water  at  20°  C.,  and  in  one  of  them 
place  a  brass  ball  weighing  526.3  grams  and  at  a  temper- 
ature of  100°  C.;  we  find  that  it  warms  the  water  to  60°  C. 
If  then  we  pour  boiling  water  at  100°  C.  into  the  other, 
taking  care  to  add  only  enough  to  warm  the  water  to  the 
same  temperature,  60°,  we  will  then  find  that  we  have  added 
only  50  grams  of  water.  As  each  vessel  was  alike  and 
contained  the  same  amount  of  water  and  was  warmed  from 
20°  to  60°,  each  must  have  received  the  same  amount  of 
heat.  The  brass  and  the  hot  water  are  each  cooled  the 
same  amount,  from  100°  to  60°.  It  took  526.3  grams  of 
brass  to  furnish  the  same  amount  of  heat  as  given  out  by 
50  grams  of  water,  .095  as  much  water  as  brass.  Hence 
the  same  weight  of  brass  gives  out  only  .095  as  much  heat 
as  water  when  cooled  through  the  same  number  of  degrees. 
The  specific  heat  of  a  body  is  the  ratio  between  the  amount 
of  heat  required  to  warm  the  body  through  1°  and  the  heat 
required  to  warm  an  equal  weight  of  water  1°.  When  we 
say  that  the.  specific  heat  of  iron  is  .1138  we  mean  that  to 
warm  any  weight  of  iron  1°  requires  only  .1138  as  much 
heat  as  would  be  required  to  warm  the  same  weight 
of  water  1°.  The  amount  of  heat  to  warm  1  gram  of 
water  1°  C.  is  one  calory  and  .1138  of  that  would  be  .1138 
of  a  calory,  hence  the  specific  heat  of  a  substance  is  often 
defined  as  the  number  of  calories  required  to  heat  one 
gram  of  a  substance  1°C.  Both  definitions  are  the  same. 
The  specific  heat  of  a  few  substances  is  given  below: 

Aluminum   22 

Brass  094 

Copper 095 


104  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

Iron 1138 

Mercury    038 

Lead 031 

Ice   , 5 

Air  (at  constant  pressure)    2375 

Hydrogen  (at  constant  pressure)    3.4 

Steam  (at  constant  pressure) 48 

What  difference  would  it  make  in  the  rate  of  warming 
up  in  the  spring  and  cooling  in  the  fall  if  Lake  Erie  were 
iron  instead  of  water?  Which  is  the  best  foot-warmer  for 
a  long  cold  ride  —  soap  stone,  hot  water  bottle,  or  a  flat 
iron?  Why? 

When  heat  is  applied  to  a  metal,  one  of  the  effects  is  to 
cause  molecules  to  vibrate  faster  and  increase  the  length 
of  their  paths  crowding  the  other  molecules  back  and  making 
the  total  space  occupied  by  the  body  larger.  The  rate  of 
expansion  is  not  the  same  for  different  metals.  The  frac- 
tion of  its  length  which  a  body  expands  while  its  temperature 
is  raised  1°,  or  the  expansion  of  unit  length  for  one  degree 
change  in  temperature  is  the  coefficient  of  linear  expansion. 

The  following  coefficients  are  given  per  degree  Centi- 
grade. Since  the  Fahrenheit  degree  is  I  of  the  Centigrade 
degree  these  may  be  changed  to  the  Fahrenheit  by  multi- 
plying by  f. 

Aluminum 0000222 

Brass 0000187 

Glass 0000083 

Iron 0000112 

Platinum 0000088 

Steel   : 0000013  (tempered) 

Steel    0000011  (untempered) 

The  Hippodrome  has  put  in  a  steam  pipe  400  feet  long, 
and  to  allow  for  expansion  " expansion  collars"  are  put  in. 
Each  of  these  allows  the  end  of  the  next  pipe  to  slip  with- 
in it,  giving  1 J  inches  free  play.  How  many  of  these  must 


HEAT  105 

be  put  in  to  allow  for  a  range  in  temperature  from  32°  F. 
to  232°  F? 

Examine  the  balance  wheel  of  a  watch,  the  pendulum -of  a 
clock,  and  the  thermostat,  to  see  how  the  different  rates 
of  expansion  for  two  metals  are  applied. 

Why  should  the  pattern  to  be  used  in  the  foundry  be 
made  larger  than  the  finished  casting 
is  to  be?  The  melting  point  for  brass 
is  1020°  C.  and  for  iron  from  1500°  C. 
to  1600°  C.  Figure  out  a  general  rule 
to  give  to  the  pattern  maker,  who  may 
be  working  in  your  shop  some  day, 
regarding  the  allowance  to  be  made 
for  shrinking  in  casting  each  of  the 
above  metals. 

Why  do  castings  often  "  warp  "  in 
cooling?  Why  is  platinum  the  only 
metal  which  can  be  successfully  sealed 
in  glass? 

If  a  bar  of  iron  is  heated  it  will  ex- 
pand in  width  and  thickness  as  well 
as  in  length.  As  these  expansions  are 
all  small  the  corners  are  neglected 
and  the  coefficient  of  the  cubical  ex- 
pansion is  taken  as  three  times  the 
linear  expansion. 

If  a  gas  is  confined  in  a  cylinder  with  a  movable  piston 
fitted  so  that  it  moves  easily  but  yet  is  air  tight,  any  ex- 
pansion of  the  gas  will  force  the  piston  back  against  the 
pressure  of  the  air  and  we  will  have  the  gas  expand- 
ing under  constant  pressure.  We  will  find  that  the 
expansion  of  all  gases  follows  the  same  law  and  that 
each  expands  ^  of  its  volume  at  0°  C.,  if  the  pressure 
remains  constant,  or  that  the  pressure  changes  ???  of 


106 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


its  pressure  at  0°  C.  if  the  volume  is  kept  constant.  If  a 
gas  is  cooled  while  the  pressure  is  constant,  it  will  con- 
tract STS  of  its  volume  at  0°  C.  for  every  degree  change 
in  temperature.  If  it  were  to  keep  this  up  while  it  was 
cooled  from  0°  C.  to  -273°  C.  its  volume  would  decrease 
to  0.  For  this  reason  -273°  is  taken  as  absolute  0.  The 
law  then  may  be  stated  that  at  constant  pressure  the  volume 
of  a  gas  is  proportional  to  its  absolute  temperature,  or  at 
constant  volume  the  pressure  of  a  gas  is  proportional  to  its 
absolute  temperature.  This  is  known  as  the  Law  of  Charles 
and  holds  for  all  gases  except  when  they  are  near  their 
point  of  liquefaction. 

Fig.  81  shows  a  simple  form  of  apparatus  for  demonstrat- 
ing the  Law  of  Charles.     Tube  a  contains  dry  air,  and  by 

adjusting  b  so  that  the 
mercury  is  at  the  same 
level  in  a  and  b  the 
confined  gas  is  at  a 
pressure  of  one  atmos- 
phere. By  rilling  the 
jacket  first  with  ice,  then  with  cold  water,  hot  water, 
and  last  with  steam,  the  volume  or  length  of  a}  which  is 
proportional  to  volume,  may  be  taken  at ,  temperatures 
from  0°  to  100°  C.  The  results  plotted  as  Fig.  82  give 
a  line  crossing  zero  volume  at  a  point  very  near  -273  C. 


-273  °C. 


-200' 


-100° 

FIG.  82. 


Temp.C. 


Problems 

1.  How  many  1^-inch  expansion  collars  must  be  put  into  a  700-foot 
steam  pipe  to  allow  for  a  range  of  temperature  of  200°  F.? 

2.  The  pattern  maker  allows  i  inch  per  foot  for  shrinkage  in  making 
a  pattern  for  cast-iron  if  the  melting  point  of  iron  is  2075°  F.  how  much 
of  this  is  for  contraction  and  how  much  for  machining? 

3.  If  the  melting  temperature  of  brass  is  1692°  F.  how  much  must 
be  allowed  for  shrinkage  in  making  patterns  for  brass  casting?     How 
much  for  aluminum  castings,  melting  temperature  being  1157°  F. 


HEAT  107 

4.  Why  is  platinum  always  used  where  a  metal  must  be  sealed  into 
glass  to  make  an  air-tight  joint? 

5.  How  much  steam  will  be  required  at  212°  F  to  melt  a  ton  of  ice 
at  32°  F.? 

If  one  pound  of  coal  yields  11,000  B.  T.  U.,  and  one  half  is  lost  in  radia- 
tion, how  many  pounds  will  be  required  to  melt  100  pounds  of  ice  at 
32°  F.  and  change  it  to  steam  at  212°  F.? 

6.  If  1000  pounds  of  water  enter  the  boiler  of  a  locomotive  and 
leave  the  engine  as  exhaust  steam,  how  many  B.T.U's  do  they  carry 
away  as  latent  heat? 


CHAPTER  VIII 
ENGINES 

WE  have  noted  that  heat  is  a  form  of  kinetic  energy. 
Every  boy  has  observed  that,  when  a  hammer  strikes  a 
piece  of  iron,  mechanical  energy  is  changed  to  heat.  Elec- 
trical energy  is  changed  to  heat  in  the  electric  lamp,  and 
stored  chemical  energy  is  changed  to  heat  in  the  firebox 
when  coal  or  any  fuel  is  burned.  The  question  arises,  can 
the  process  be  reversed  —  can  heat  energy  be  changed 
into  mechanical  energy  for  doing  useful  work?  For  answer, 
ask  yourself  what  runs  the  steam-engine,  the  gas-engine, 
or  the  hot-air  engine. 

THE    STEAM-ENGINE 

When  a  vessel  of  cold  water  is  placed  over  a  fire  the  water 
at  the  bottom  in  contact  with  the  heated  portion  of  metal 
is  warmed.  This  causes  the  water  to  expand  and  there- 
fore becomes  lighter.  It  is  then  pushed  up  by  the  heavier 
cold  water  which  flows  in  to  take  its  place.  This  circu- 
lation, known  as  convection  currents,  is  kept  up  until  the 
whole  mass  of  water  is  heated.  We  have  already  learned 
that  heat  makes  the  molecules  of  water  move  about  or 
bound  to  and  fro  faster.  Some  of  them  will  move  so  fast 
that  they  will  jump  through  the  surface  into  the  air.  This 
is  evaporation  and  takes  place  more  rapidly  as  the  tempera- 
ture rises.  The  pressure  of  the  air  normally  is  14.7  pounds. 
When  the  particles  of  water  get  to  moving  so  rapidly  that 
their  pressure  trying  to  jump  out  is  equal  to  the  pressure 
of  air  on  the  surface,  they  will  escape  rapidly  and  force  the 

108 


ENGINES  109 

air  back.  The  temperature  at  which  they  do  this  is  the 
boiling  point.  It  is  evident  that  as  the  pressure  is  increased 
the  speed  with  which  the  molecules  move  before  they  will 
jump  out  must  be  greater,  that  is  the  temperature  must  be 
higher.  The  boiling  point  of  a  liquid  is  the  temperature  at 
which  its  vapor  tension  is  equal  to  the  applied  pressure. 
The  boiling  point  of  water  at  normal  pressure  is  212°  F. 
The  boiling  point  in  the  boiler  of  a  Lake  Shore  locomotive 
running  at  200  pounds  is  about  387  F.  While  at  a  height 
of  three  and  one-half  miles  above  sea  level,  where  the  pres- 
sure of  the  the  air  is  7f  rpounds  per  square  inch,  the  boiling 
point  is  only  180°  F. 

One  cubic  foot  of  water  weighs  62J  pounds,  but  one  pound 
of  water  changed  to  steam  at  the  pressure  of  the  atmosphere 
occupies  26.4  cubic  ft.,  that  is,  the  62|  pounds  would 
occupy  1650  cubic  ft.,  at  a  pressure  of  14.7  pounds  per 
square  inch.  If  water  in  a  closed  boiler  is  heated  the  space 
will  soon  be  filled  with  steam  and  the  pressure  will  rise. 
The  pressure  rises  until  a  balance  occurs,  then  the  par- 
ticles of  steam  condensing  to  water  are  equal  to  the  par- 
ticles of  water  jumping  off.  The  space  contains  all  the 
steam  it  will  hold  at  the  given  temperature.  Any  increase 
of  pressure  will  cause  some  of  it  to  condense  and  any 
decrease  in  temperature  will  cause  some  of  the  steam  to 
condense.  This  is  called  saturated  steam.  Boiler  steam  in 
contact  with  water  is  always  saturated  steam.  If  the  same 
steam  is  conducted  to  a  chamber  separated  from  the  water 
and  heated  above  the  boiling  point  corresponding  to  its 
pressure,  it  is  called  superheated  steam. 

We  are  now  ready  to  study  the  steam-engine.  Examine 
the  engine  in  the  laboratory  and  draw  a  section  of  the 
working  parts.  Compare  with  Fig.  83. 

Live  steam  from  the  boiler  is  admitted  to  the  steam 
chest  through  pipe  a.  In  the  position  shown  the  steam 


110 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


passes  through  port  b  to  the  left  or  head  end  of  the  piston 
and  pushes  it  along.  The  exhaust  steam  in  the  right  or 
crank  end  of  the  cylinder  is  driven  out  through  the  port  e 


FIG.  83.  —  Slide  valve  steam-engine. 

to  the  exhaust  pipe  c.  As  the  stroke  progresses  the  valve 
is  moved  by  the  eccentric  so  that  it  closes  the  port  6,  not 
admitting  any  more  steam  to  the  left  end  of  the  cylinder. 


FIG.  84.  —  Section  model  of  a  slide  valve  steam-engine. 

The  continued  motion  of  the  valve  then  releases  the  steam 
in  the  head  end  of  the  cylinder  to  the  exhaust,  and  admission 
at  the  other  end  takes  place  and  live  steam  rushes  in  to 


ENGINES  111 

push  the  piston  back.  Opening  the  port  for  live  steam  is 
called  ''admission";  closing  the  live  steam  port  is  "cut 
off."  Opening  the  exhaust  port  is  "  release " ;  closing 
the  exhaust  port  is  "  exhaust  closure."  The  valves  are 
usually  set  so  that  the  admission  takes  place  a  fraction  of 
a  second  before  the  piston  reaches  the  end  of  its  stroke  in 
order  that  the  space  may.  be  filled  with  live  steam  when 
the  return  stroke  begins:  this  is  called  "  lead." 

The  horse-power  of  a  steam-engine  is  rated  by  two 
methods.  One  is  called  the  delivered  or  brake  horse- 
power and  is  measured  by  the  Prony  brake  as  already 
described.  This  measures  the  actual  delivered  horse-power. 
The  other  method  is  by  means  of  the  indicator  card.  If 
the  pressure  on  the  piston  were  the  same  as  boiler  pressure 
throughout  the  length  of  the  stroke,  the  horse-power  would 
evidently  be  the  total  pressure  tending  to  move  the  piston 
multiplied  by  the  distance  the  piston  moves  per  minute, 
divided  by  33,000.  The  total  pressure  tending  to  move  the 
piston  is  the  difference  between  the  pressure  per  square 
inch  on  the  live  side  and  the  back  pressure  per  square  inch 
on  the  exhaust  side  multiplied  by  the  piston  area  in  square 
inches.  In  practice  however  it  is  not  advisable  to  admit 
live  steam  from  the  boiler  throughout  the  stroke.  It  is 
far  more  economical  to  admit  steam  at  boiler  pressure  for 
part  of  the  stroke  (from  one  third  to  one-half  of  the  length 
of  the  stroke)  and  then  have  the  valve  "cut  off,"  that  is, 
close  the  entry  port.  The  inclosed  steam  then  continues 
to  push  the  piston  along  for  the  rest  of  the  stroke,  expanding 
as  it  does  so.  During  this  part  of  the  stroke  no  more 
energy  is  added  to  the  steam  cylinder.  The  steam  is 
expanding  and  doing  work  at  the  expense  of  its  own  tem- 
perature. Energy  which  would  be  carried  away  as  heat 
is  saved  for  useful  work.  It  is  advisable  to  have  the  steam 
enter  the  cylinder  as  hot  as  possible  and  leave  it  as  cool  as 


112 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


PencC 


possible.  The  compound  engine  allows  this  expansion  and 
consequent  drop  in  temperature  to  take  place  twice  or 
even  four  times  in  the  quadruple  expansion  engine.  While 
this  expansion  is  taking  place  the  pressure  drops  and  the 
average  pressure  during  the  stroke  must  be  used  in  com- 
puting the  horse-power. 

The  indicator  is  a  device  for  finding  this  mean  effective 
pressure  and  at  ttie  same  time  showing  the  setting  of  the 
valves  of  the  engine. 

Fig.  85  shows  part  of  the  mechanism  of  the  indicator.  A 
tap  is  made  in  each  end  of  the  cylinder.  This  tap  at  one 

end  of  the  cylinder  is 
then  connected  to  pipe 
at  the  bottom  of  the 
indicator.  The  steam 
forces  the  piston  (6) 
whose  area  is  \  inch  up 
against  a  spring  and  in 
doing  so  carries  pencil 

(d)  up    a   distance 
proportional    to    the 
amount    of    pressure. 
If,  while  the  cylinder 

(e)  stands  still  steam 
is    alternately   ad- 
mitted and  withdrawn  from  the  indicator,  the  pencil  traces 
the  straight  vertical  line.     The  cylinder  (e)  is  carried  on  a 
pivot  and  connected  with  a  string  to  the  piston  rod  of  the 
engine,  so  that  it  revolves  back  and  forth  as  the  piston  rod 
makes  its  stroke.     If  no  steam  is  admitted  to  the  indicator 
while  the  cylinder  revolves,  the  pencil  will  trace  the  hori- 
zontal line  (y) .     If  both  these  take  place  at  the  same  time 
while  the  engine  is  working,  the  pencil  will  trace  a  curve 
representing  the  two  variables,  the  one  on  the  vertical  or 


FIG.  85.  —  Steam  indicator. 


ENGINES  113 

(x)  axis  being  proportional  to  the  pressure  pushing  the 
piston,  and  the  one  on  the  horizontal  axis  being  propor- 
tional to  the  movement  of  the  piston  on  its  stroke  or  in 
proportion  to  the  volume  behind  the  piston. 

Such  a  card  for  the  head  end  of  a  Corliss  engine  is  shown 
in  Fig.  86.  A  is  point  of  admission  taking  place  just  as  the 
piston  is  at  the  end  of  its 
stroke  and  the  line  rises 
along  the  vertical  line  to 
B.  B  C  is  the  steam  line, 
steam  at  boiler  pressure 
being  admitted.  C  is  the 
point  of  "  cut  off ."  From 
C  to  D  the  steam  is  work-  ,-, 

r  IG.   oO. 

ing  expansively.      CD  is 

the  expansion  line,  and  during  this  time  pressure  and  temp- 
erature are  falling.  D  is  the  release,  EF  is  the  back  press- 
ure line  during  exhaust,  F  is  exhaust  closure.  This  takes 
place  before  the  piston  reaches  the  end  of  its  stroke  in  order 
to  confine  enough  of  the  exhaust  steam  to  cushion  the  recip- 
rocating parts  of  the  engine  which  may  weigh  several  hun- 
dred pounds  and  would  soon  pound  the  engine  to  pieces 
if  their  rapid  motion  were  not  stopped  against  this  elastic 
cushion  of  steam.  The  line  FA  is  the  compression  line 
showing  the  rise  of  pressure  as  the  parts  are  cushioned. 

To  find  the  horse-power:  The  springs  commonly  used 
for  the  indicator  are  so  made  that  the  figure  is  drawn  to 
scale  1  inch  to  80  pounds  or  1  to  100  or  1  to  120,  etc.  If 
the  average  altitude  of  the  figure  between  the  steam  and 
expansion  line  for  one  side  of  the  stroke  and  the  back  pres- 
sure line  on  the  other  side  of  the  stroke  is  used  and  multi- 
plied by  the  scale  of  the  spring,  the  result  is  the  mean 

effective  pressure.     Then  we  have  H  = 


114 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


Where  H  =  Horse-power 

L  =  Length  of  stroke  in  feet 
P  =  Mean  effective  pressure 
A  =  Area  of  piston  in  square  inches 
N  =  Number  of  times  steam  pressure  is  applied  to 
the  piston  per  minute  or  in  the  steam-engine   twice   the 
R.P.M.     The  result  is  called  the  indicated  horse-power  and 
is  always  somewhat  larger  than  the  brake  horse-power. 


FIG.  87. 

Steam  indicator,  piston,  extra  springs,  reducing  wheel,  and  a  card 
or  diagram  taken  on  a  400-horse-power  Corliss  engine. 

The  efficiency  of  the  best  reciprocating  engines  is  a 
little  below  15%  and  of  the  best  locomotive  about  10%. 
That  is,  of  all  the  stored  energy  in  the  form  of  fuel  put  in, 
only  about  10%  is  delivered  as  useful  work.  About  70% 
is  lost  in  the  form  of  heat  losses  which  cannot  be  recovered. 

In  an  indicator  card  the  average  height  is  .812  inches; 
spring  40  was  used;  LOO  R.P.M.;  stroke  30  inches;  piston 
diameter  15  inches.  What  is  the  indicated  horse-power? 


ENGINES  115 

2  X  40  =  80  scale  of  spring  used 
80  X  .812  =  64.96  Ibs.     Mean  effective  pressure 
100  X  2  =  200  times  steam  is  admitted 
30  -f-  12  =  2|  ft.  stroke 
(15)2  X  .7854  =  176.7  square  inches  area  of  piston 

PLAN      64.96  X  2j  X  176.7  X  200 


In  an  indicator  card  the  average  height  is  .642  inch; 
spring  30;  200  r.p.m.;  piston  diameter  9  inches;  stroke 
15  inches.  What  is  the  indicated  horse-power? 

1.  Divide  Fig.  49  into  ten  spaces,  measure  the  altitude  of  each,  and 
get  the  average  height.     If  it  was  taken  with  spring  30  and  the  engine 
was  running  150  R.P.M.,  diameter  of  piston  10  inches,  length  of  stroke 
30  inches,  what  is  the  indicated  horse  -power? 

2.  Average  height  of  indicator  card  is  .45  inch,  spring  60  was  used, 
diameter  of  piston  18  inches,  stroke  30  inches,  300  R.P.M.     What  is 
the  horse-power? 

STEAM    TURBINES 

There  are  at  present  on  the  market  three  types  of  turbine 
engines,  DeLaval,  Westinghouse-Parsons,  and  the  Curtis 
turbine.  As  the  Curtis  turbine  in  a  measure  combines 
the  other  two  we  will  describe  that  one  only.  In  the  Curtis 
turbine  the  parts  shown  in  Fig.  88  are  arranged  in  the 
circumference  of  a  circle.  The  moving  blades  (6.6.)  are 
carried  on  the  circumference  of  a  wheel.  An  observer  at 
the  center  looking  out  would  have  the  view  shown  here. 
The  steam  expanding  through  nozzles  at  a.  a.  comes  with 
great  velocity  to  the  moving  blades  6.  These  are  driven 
forward,  not  by  steam  pressure  but  by  the  kinetic  energy 
of  its  impact.  The  second  row  of  blades  (c)  is  held  sta- 
tionary to  change  the  direction  of  the  steam  so  that  it  will 
strike  the  next  row  of  moving  blades  the  same  as  it  did 
the  first.  The  steam  is  carried  through  a  large  number  of 


116 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


these  rows  of  blades.     As  the  steam  expands,  the  circum- 
ference of  successive  rows  is  increased  by  placing  them  on 


Moving 
.Blades 

Stationary 
Blades 

Moving 
Blades 


FIG.  88. 


circles  of  larger  diameter.     The  turbine  is  not  reversible 
and  works  at  its  best  efficiency  when  running  at  high 

speed  for  a  long  continued 
run.  They  occupy  much 
less  space  than  reciprocat- 
ing engines  of  the  same 
horse-power.  These  facts 
combine  to  make  them 
valuable  for  ocean  steam- 
ship service. 

•  'iC^pM  The  turbine  works  at  its 

best    efficiency    when    the 
steam    is    expanded     and 
moving  at  high  speed.     On 
FIG.  89.  —  De  Laval  turbine,  with  a    th      th  r  han(j  the  recipro- 
single  set  of  blades.  .  ... 

eating  engine  works  at  its 

highest  efficiency  when  the  steam  is  at  high  pressure.    The 


ENGINES  117 

efficiency  of  the  best  reciprocating  compound  engines  is 
almost  14%  and  that  of  the  best  turbines  about  15%. 

The  Subway  power  plant  of  New  York  has  recently 
installed  turbines  between  the  condensing  chamber  and 
the  low-pressure  cylinder  of  the  compound  reciprocating 
engines  and  found  the  combined  efficiency  22.3%.  They 
have  almost  doubled  the  power  output  of  their  plant  with- 
out increasing  the  floor  space  or  the  amount  of  coal  used. 
This  is  the  greatest  advance  in  steam  engineering  in  recent 
years. . 

The  horse-power  of  a  turbine  cannot  be  taken  by  indi- 
cator card,  hence  the  rated  horse-power  is  the  brake  or 
delivered  horse-power. 

THE    GAS-ENGINE 

The  gas-engine  is  a  heat  engine.  In  the  "  four-cycle  " 
engine  shown  in  Fig.  90,  the  piston  on  its  down  stroke 
draws  in  a  mixture  of  explosive  gas,  either  gas,  gasoline 
vapor,  alcohol  vapor,  or  coal  oil  vapor,  mixed  with  the  proper 
proportion  of  air.  On  the  return  this  gas  is  compressed, 
and  then  the  spark  at  the  spark  plug  (a)  explodes  the 
mixture.  The  heat  generated  causes  the  gases  to  expand 
and  push  the  piston  down.  On  the  next  return  stroke  the 
exhaust  valve  is  mechanically  opened  and  the  gases  are 
driven  out  ready  for  the  next-  cycle.  It  will  be  seen  that 
there  are  two  revolutions  or  four  strokes  to  each  explosion. 
In  the  two-cycle  engine  there  is  an  explosion  for  each  revo- 
lution or  two  strokes. 

Fig  .91  is  a  section  of  a  three-port  valveless  two-cycle 
engine.  When  the  piston  is  near  the  top  of  its  stroke  the 
explosive  mixture  is  drawn  in  at  a,  passing  to  the  air-tight 
crank  case.  This  is  somewhat  compressed  on  the  down 
stroke.  The  exhaust  port  is  at  c,  and  opens  slightly 
before  the  port  d  is  uncovered.  When  the  piston  is  at 


118 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


the  lower  end  of  its  stroke  the  burned  out  gases  pass  out 
at  c  and  the  mixture  from  the  crank  case  passes  in  at  d. 
A  baffle  plate  or  deflector  prevents  its  blowing  across  and 


FIG.  91.  — Three-port, 
valveless,  two-cycle  gas- 
engine. 


FIG.  90.  — Four-cycle  gas-engine. 

out  at  the  exhaust.  The  return  stroke  compresses  the 
gas  ready  for  the  explosion.  An  explosion  takes  place  at 
each  revolution  or  every  two  cycles. 

The  explosive  mixture  is  a  gas  and  is  a  gas  after  the 
explosion.     The  chemical  change  does  not  produce  any 


ENGINES 


119 


great  change  in  volume  such  as  would  result  when  a  solid 
changes  to  a  gas,  as  in  explosion  of  gunpowder.     The  tem- 


FIQ.  92. 

Gas-engine,  with  carburettor,  built  by  a 
high-school  boy. 

perature  however  is  changed  through  a  wide  range  and, 
since  the  volume  is  expanded  ^fs  of  its  volume  at  freezing 
point  for  each  degree  Centigrade,  it  expands  violently. 
This  is  strictly  a  heat  engine  and  the  hotter  it  can  be  run 
the  more  efficiently  it  will  work.  The  limit  to  the  tem- 
perature is  set  by  the  temperature  at  which  the  moving 
parts  will  work  and  can  be  lubricated. 

For  finding  the  horse-power  of  a  gas-engine  the   most 
accurate  method  is  the  Prony  brake.     A  special  form  of 


120  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

indicator  is  also  used  to  find  the  mean  effective  pressure 
and  this  is  substituted  in  the  formula 

=   33,000 

The  following  formulas  are  commonly  used  and  are 
approximately  accurate.  The  Association  of  Licensed 
Automobile  Manufacturers  use  the  formula 

D2  N       D  =  Diameter  of  cylinder,  in  inches 
2.5         N  =  Number  of  cylinders 

This  gives  the  horse-power  only  at  full  speed.  Find  the 
horse-power  of  4-cylinder  engine  with  4-inch  cylinders. 

H.P.  =  — -——  =  25.6  horse-power 
2.5 

A  formula  often  used  is 

SCAN 


H.P. 


12000 


S  =  stroke  in  inches 
C=  number  of  cylinders 
A=  piston  area 
N=  number  R.P.M. 

HOT-AIR  ENGINE 

The  hot-air  engine  has  no  valves  nor  ports.  A  confined 
quantity  of  gas  is  alternately  heated  and  cooled.  The  re- 
sulting expansion  and  contraction  cause  changes  in  pres- 
sure which  run  the  engine.  It  does  not  work  very  efficiently, 
but,  because  of  its  simplicity  and  slight  care  needed,  is 
much  used  to  run  farm  pumps.  In  Fig.  93,  heat  is  ap- 
plied at  c,  a  is  the  working  piston  fitting  tightly  in  the 
cylinder,  b  is  the  displacer  fitting  loosely.  The  air  becomes 


ENGINES 


121 


heated  and  forces  a  out  to  position  shown  in  section.     The 
displacer  is  moved  over  to  positions  forcing  the  air  out  to 


FIG.  93.  —  Section  of  hot-air  engine. 

end  d.  Here  it  is  cooled,  and  its  contraction  allows  the 
outside  atmospheric  pressure  to  force  the  piston  back  to 
position  /. 


FIG.  94. 

The  hot-air  engine  of  which  section  is  shown  in  Fig.  93. 
are  no  valves  and  few  parts  to  keep  in  order. 


There 


122  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

Since  heat  may  be  changed  to  other  forms  of  energy  and 
other  forms  of  energy  may  be  changed  to  heat  energy,  it 
must  be  that  a  certain  amount  of  heat  is  equivalent  to  a 
foot-pound  of  energy.  Just  before  our  Civil  War,  an  Eng- 
lishman, J.  P.  Joule,  after  several  years  of  measurements, 
found  that  one  B.T.U.  is  equal  to  778  foot-pounds  of  energy. 
This  means  that  in  the  metric  system,  one  kilogram  calory 
of  heat  is  equal  to  427  kilogram  meters  of  energy.  The 
water  of  Niagara  Falls  changes  its  kinetic  energy  to  heat, 
and  by  means  of  the  heat  equivalent,  it  is  possible  to  com- 
pute the  rise  in  temperature  due  to  the  descent  of  the  water. 

If  a  one-pound  weight  were  allowed  to  fall  freely  778 
feet,  it  would  have,  at  the  moment  of  striking,  778  foot- 
pounds of  kinetic  energy.  This  changed  to  heat  would 
be  1  B.T.U. 

A  good  grade  of  coal,  such  as  pocahontas,  yields,  when 
burned,  about  14,000  B.T.U's  per  pound.  Suppose  one 
pound  of  coal  (14,000  heat  value)  be  used  under  a  boiler 
and  the  steam  be  used  to  run  an  engine.  The  14,000 
B.T.U's  are  equivalent  to  14,000  X  778  or  10,892,000  foot- 
pounds. If  the  combination  is  working  at  10%  efficiency 
this  would  mean  a  yield  of  1,089,200  foot-pounds  of  work 
or  the  equivalent  of  one  horse-power  for  33  minutes. 

How  many  pounds  of  such  coal  would  be  required  to 
melt  one  ton  of  ice  at  32°  F.  and  change  it  to  steam  at 
212°  F.  if  25  %  of  the  heat  is  lost? 

If  air  weighs  .08  pound  per  cubic  foot,  how  much  coal 
would  be  required  to  warm  the  air  of  a  room  30  X  50  X  15 
feet  70°  F.? 

Heat  energy  may  be  carried  from  one  point  to  another 
by  three  different  methods.  If  one  end  of  an  iron  rod  is 
heated  in  the  forge  the  other  end  soon  becomes  too  hot 
to  handle.  This  method  of  transmitting  heat  by  one 
molecule  heating  the  next  one  is  conduction.  A  glass  rod 


ENGINES  123 

may  be  held  in  the  hand  while  the  end  a  few  inches  away 
is  melted.  If  rods  of  silver,  copper,  iron,  and  brass  are 
heated  at  one  end,  the  heat  will  not  travel  along  them  at 
equal  rates.  Most  of  the  metals  are  good  conductors. 
Silver  and  copper  are  the  best,  while  iron  is  not  so  good 
and  glass  is  almost  a  non-conductor  and  air  and  water  are 
very  poor  conductors  of  heat.  A  copper  boiler  is  better 
than  an  iron  one  for  boiling  the  clothes  as  it  will  conduct 
the  heat  better.  For  the  same  reason  a  copper  teakettle 
is  better  than  an  iron  one. 

When  air  is  heated  it  expands  and  is  therefore  lighter 
than  cooler  air.  If  the  air  in  one  part  of  the  room  is  heated 
it  will  be  forced  up  by  the  heavier  air  crowding  in  to  take 
its  place.  If  a  lighted  match  is  held  over  a  radiator,  rising 
currents  of  air  will  be  found.  Near  the  floor,  currents  of 
air  toward  the  radiator,  and  near  the  top  of  the  room 
currents  of  air  away  from  the  radiator  will  be  shown.  These 
are  convection  currents.  The  draft  of  a  chimney,  the  air 
rising  in  a  hot  air  furnace,  the  trade  winds  and  nearly  all 
our  terrestrial  winds  are  convection  currents.  The  hot 
water  heater  is  a  good  example  of  heat  transmission  by 
convection  currents. 

In  the  last  two  paragraphs,  we  found  that  heat  is  carried 
from  one  place  to  another  along  a  continuous  solid  by  con- 
duction and  from  one  place  to  another  by  convection  cur- 
rents, as  in  the  hot  water  heater  when  water  is  heated  in  the 
boiler  by  contact  and  then  carried  along  by  convection  cur- 
rents to  heat  radiator  by  actual  contact.  We  know  that 
heat  is  brought  to  us  from  the  sun,  that  it  travels  through 
space  where  there  is  no  matter  to  carry  it  either  by  conduc- 
tion or  convection.  We  know  that  it  travels  with  great 
velocity  and  that  it  comes  through  the  window  without 
warming  the  glass.  This  is  called  radiant  heat  and  is  sup- 
posed to  be  waves  in  ether,  as  light  is,  with  a  longer  wave 


124  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

length.  Radiant  heat,  as  waves  of  ether,  travels  on  with 
the  velocity  of  light  until  it  collides  with  some  surface 
which  is  able  to  change  it  to  the  ordinary  form  of  heat. 
If  radiant  heat  from  the  sun  strikes  a  black  rough  sub- 
stance like  iron,  it  is  changed  to  kinetic  heat.  This  is 
called  absorption.  If  the  waves  strike  a  polished  surface 
like  a  mirror  they  are  reflected  and  pass  out  again  to 
space.  A  black  suit  is  hotter  in  summer  than  a  light 
colored  one  because  it  absorbs  a  greater  quantity  of  the 
radiant  heat  striking  upon  it.  Explain  how  a  greenhouse 
traps  the  heat  from  the  sun.  Explain  why  the  mountain 
climber  on  top  of  Mt.  Shasta  must  cover  every  part  of  his 
face  or  it  will  be  seriously  blistered,  while  the  snow  never 
melts.  Why  is  the  upper  air  so  cold  while  radiant  heat 
is  coming  from  the  sun  to  the  earth?  Why  does  the 
radiant  heat  of  the  sun  fail  to  reach  the  earth  on  a  cloudy 
day?  Why  do  we  get  our  early  frosts  only  on  clear 
nights? 

We  have  discussed  the  change  of  radiant  heat  to  sensible 
heat;  is  the  process  ever  reversed?  A  glowing  grate, 
glowing  coals,  or  a  hot  iron  will  send  out  radiant  heat  and 
in  so  doing  will  be  cooled.  It  is  found  by  experiment 
that  a  hot  body  with  a  black  rough  surface  will  radiate 
its  heat  much  more  rapidly  than  a  polished  surface.  A 
good  radiator  is  also  a  good  absorber  and  a  poor  radiator 
is  also  a  poor  absorber.  A  black  kettle  will  heat  more 
quickly  than  a  polished  one  and  then  when  set  aside  with 
hot  water  in  it  will  cool  more  quickly.  A  bright  polished 
teapot  will  keep  the  tea  hot  on  the  table  longer  than  the 
dingy  iron  one.  This  is  because  the  surface  is  a  poor 
radiator  although  the  silver  is  a  good  conductor. 

Laying  aside  art  and  beauty,  the  nickel  and  polish  on 
your  heating  stove  might  better  be  replaced  with  black 
iron  rough  surfaces,  as  they  are  better  radiators.  Why  does 


ENGINES 


125 


snow  under  a  dirty  black  cover  melt  before  the  clear  white 
article  does? 

Freshly  fallen  snow  is  a  poor  conductor  of  heat  because 
it  has  much  air  confined  in  the  small  spaces,  and  air  is  a 
non-conductor  where 
it  cannot  set  up  con- 
vection  currents. 
Loosely  woven  wool- 
en goods  are  poor 
conductors  for  the 
same  reason.  In  hot 
countries  closely 
woven  white  goods 
are  worn  as  they  re- 
flect the  heat  from 
without  and  conduct 
the  heat  from  the 
body. 

Study  the  following 
and  be  prepared  to 
report  on  them  in 
class.  Hot  air  fur- 
naces, steam  heating,  hot  water  heat,  ice  plant,  blast  fur- 
nace, and  foundry. 

In  Fig.  95,  transmission  of  heat  by  convection  currents  is 
shown  as  applied  to  the  hot  air  furnace.  The  fire  on  the 
grate  in  the  fire-box  heats  the  gases  inside  the  fire-box  to 
a  high  temperature.  This  causes  them  to  expand,  and  as 
cold  air  is  heavier  than  hot  air,  a  "  draught  "  is  caused. 
In  other  words,  the  greater  pressure  of  the  cold  air  forces 
the  smoke  up  the  chimney.  The  air  inside  the  jacket  of 
the  furnace  is  heated  and  convection  currents  are  setup 
through  the  hot  air  pipes  to  the  rooms  above. 


FIG.  95.  —  Section  of  hot  air  furnace. 


CHAPTER    IX 
MAGNETISM   AND   ELECTRICITY 

EVERY  boy  knows  that  steel  treated  in  a  certain  way 
becomes  a  magnet.  If  the  blade  of  a  knife  is  stroked  by  a 
permanent  magnet,  it  in  turn  becomes  a  magnet  and 
will  then  attract  pieces  of  iron  and  steel.  We  will  find  later 
that  there  are  other  ways  of  producing  the  same  result. 
A  kind  of  iron  ore,  called  lodestone  (leading  stone),  possesses 
the  same  property  of  holding  small  particles  of  iron.  It 
was  early  found  that  magnets,  suspended  so  that  they  were 
free  to  swing  toward  any  part  of  the  horizon,  come  to  rest 
with  one  end  pointing  toward  the  north  or  nearly  north. 
This  end  is  called  the  North  Pole.  The  opposite  end  is 
the  South  Pole. 

If  one  magnet  be  free  to  turn  and  a  second  is  brought 
near  it,  the  north  pole  of  one  will  attract  the  south  pole 
of  the  other  and  repel  the  north  pole.  Like  magnetic 
poles  repel,  and  unlike  poles  attract  each  other. 

If  a  long  bar  of  hard  steel  or  a  knitting  needle  be  mag- 
netized, and  dipped  in  filings,  a  point  near  each  end  will 
hold  a  large  bunch  of  filings,  while  the  middle  will  hold 
none.  These  strongest  points  are  the  poles.  If  a  piece 
of  soft  steel  be  brought  near  a  magnet  it  becomes  a  strong 
magnet,  but  loses  its  magnetism  as  soon  as  the  magnet  is 
removed,  while  hard  steel  will  hold  it.  If  a  magnet  is 
placed  on  a  drawing  board  and  a  sheet  of  paper  be  placed 
over  it  and  fine  iron  filings  sifted  on  the  paper,  they  will 
arrange  themselves  in  lines  as  shown  in  the  figures  below. 

126 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY 


127 


Where   the   unlike   poles   are   presented   the   lines    will 
appear  as  in  Fig.  96.     If  the  like  poles  are  toward  each  other 


fol 


FIG.  96. 


FIG.  97. 


FIG.  98. 

the  lines  run  as  in  Fig.  97,  while  for  a  single  magnet  they 
run  as  in  Fig.  98.  The  space  filled  with  these  lines  around 
a  magnet  is  called  the  magnetic  field. 


128 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


The  lines  of  force  shown  by  iron  filings  in  Fig.  96  run 
between  a  North  and  a  South  pole.  These  lines  seem  to 
act  like  stretched  rubber  bands  pulling  the  poles  together 
but  the  lines  repel  each  other  laterally.  When  two  N- 
poles  are  presented  in  Fig.  97  this  lateral  repulsion  causes 
the  poles  to  repel  each  other. 

The  lines  are  alike  at  each  pole  so  far  as  the  filings  show 
them  but  later  study  with  electrical  apparatus  will  show 


FIG.  99. 


FIG.  100. 


that  they  have  direction;  therefore  they  are  assumed  to 
pass  from  the  N-pole  around  through  space  to  the  S-pole. 

Soft  iron  within  the  field  becomes  a  magnet  by  induc- 
tion. Note  how  the  lines  crowd  together  in  order  to  pass 
through  the  soft  iron  rather  than  through  air.  The  soft 
iron  is  more  "permeable"  than  air. 

Pieces  of  iron  or  steel  brought  within  the  magnetic  field 
become  magnets  and  are  attracted,  as  in  Figs.  99  and  100. 
These  also  show  the  lines  of  force  to  be  gathered  in  more 
thickly  by  soft  iron  as  they  find  it  easier  to  pass  through 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY  129 

iron  than  through  air.  The  electrician  says  the  soft  iron 
is  more  permeable  than  air.  Glass,  paper,  wood,  and  many 
other  substances  brought  within  the  magnetic  field  are  not 
affected  by  it  and  apparently  produce  no  effect  on  the  field, 
as  the  lines  seem  to  run  through  them  as  well  as  through 
the  air.  A  few  substances  such  as  antimony  and  bismuth 
are  repelled  by  a  magnet.  We  will  find,  as  we  take  up 
the  study  of  electricity,  a  very  close  relationship  between 
electricity  and  magnetism,  and  the  facts  about  magnets 
will  constantly  be  used  in  the  study  of  electricity. 

THEORY 

The  statements  of  the  last  few  paragraphs  are  observed 
facts.  The  statements  made  in  this  paragraph  are  pure 
theory  used  to  explain  those  facts  and  may  be  changed 
any  day.  There  are  now  several  other  theories  about 
equally  as  good  and  you  must  feel  free  to  accept  this  theory 
or  some  other,  or  to  reject  all  of  them  as  you  choose.  We 
feel  that  the  next  few  years  may  see  some  discoveries  which 
will  reveal  the  true  nature  of  magnetism  and  electricity. 
It  is  supposed  that  in  a  piece  of  steel,  each  molecule  is  a 
magnet  with  a  north  pole  and  a  south  pole.  If  the  mole- 
cules are  arranged  without  any  order,  some  one  way,  some 
another,  like  a  mob,  the  north  poles  of  some  are  balanced 
by  the  south  poles  of  others  and  the  pieces  of  steel  will 
show  no  magnetism.  Let  a  magnet  be  brought  near  and 
the  molecules  will  line  up  like  a  column  of  well-drilled 
soldiers,  and  all  of  the  north  poles  will  be  in  one  direction 
and  all  of  the  south  poles  in  the  other  direction,  and  the 
whole  piece  will  show  at  one  end  a  north  pole  and  at  the 
other  a  south  pole.  In  the  middle  the  poles  will  balance 
each  other,  but,  if  the  magnet  is  broken,  each  half  will 
be  found  to  be  a  magnet.  A  piece  of  hard  steel  will  hold 
its  molecules  lined  up  and  hence  hold  its  magnetism,  while 
10 


130  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

a  piece  of  soft  steel  will  let  them  rearrange  themselves  so 
that  it  will  not  hold  its  magnetism. 

The  ether  in  the  space  surrounding  a  magnet  is  supposed 
to  be  under  a  strain,  and  this  strain  reveals  itself  in  the  so- 
called  lines  of  force  shown  by  the  iron  filings  near  a  magnet. 
These  lines  of  force  are  said  to  begin  at  the  north  pole  and 
pass  around  to  the  south  pole,  then  through  the  magnet 
to  the  place  of  beginning.  They  act  as  stretched  rubber 
bands  which  tend  to  shrink  to  zero  length.  They  repel  each 
other  laterally  and  try  to  get  as  far  apart  as  they  can.  How 
nicely  this  explains  the  attraction  of  unlike  poles  and  the  re- 
pulsion between  like  poles  of  Figs.  97  and  98.  But  do  not 
forget  that  this  is  theory  and  so  far  has  never  been  proved. 

The  earth  is  a  great  magnet.  When  iron  filings  are 
placed  near  a  bar  magnet  each  piece  of  steel  arranges  itself 
with  its  length  in  one  of  the  lines  of  force.  .A  magnetic 
needle  free  to  turn  does  the  same  thing  in  the  earth's 
field.  We  say  the  needle  points  north.  This  is  not  strictly 
true.  The  north  magnetic  pole  and  the  geographic  North 
Pole  found  by  Peary  are  not  at  the  same  place.  The  mag- 
netic pole  is  about  1000  miles  south  of  the  North  Pole,  at 
latitude  70°  North,  longitude  97°  West,  north  of  Hudson 
Bay.  The  needle  does  not  always  point  in  the  same  direc- 
tion but  slowly  changes  its  direction  through  a  long  period 
of  years  and  then  swings  back  again.  A  needle  free  to 
move  in  a  vertical  plane  will  not  remain  horizontal  but 
will  "  dip,"  that  is,  its  north  end  will  drop  down.  At  the 
magnetic  pole  the  needle  stands  in  a  vertical  line. 

ELECTRICITY 

At  the  present  time  scientists  do  not  know  what  elec- 
tricity is.  Electricians  know  a  few  things  about  it  and  may 
know  some  day  what  it  is.  It  is  closely  related  to  light 
on  one  hand  and  magnetism  on  the  other,  and  these  things 


MAGNETISM  AND  ELECTRICITY  131 

lead  us  to  think  that  it  may  be  some  kind  of  disturbance 
or  strain  in  the  ether,  or  it  may  be  something  always  ac- 
companied by  a  strain  in  ether.  If  this  strain  is  com- 
municated to  one  part  of  a  body  made  of  certain  material, 
such  as  copper,  the  electricity  is  distributed  to  all  parts  of 
the  surface.  Such  a  substance  is  called  a  conductor  and 
the  electric  strain  while  being  transmitted  is  called  an 
electric  current. 

We  have  mapped  the  magnetic  field  around  a  magnet 
and  have  seen  how  something  which  we  call  lines  of  force 
fills  the  space  near  a  magnet.  If  a  loop  of  wire  or  any 
conductor  of  electricity  is  placed  within  this  field  some  of 
the  lines  of  force  will  pass  through  the  loop;  we  might  say 
they  link  with  the  conductor.  If  by  any  means  the  number 
of  lines  of  force  linking  through  the  loop  of  the  conductor 
is  changed,  an  electric  current  is  set  up.  We  may  cause 
this  change  in  the  number  of  lines  of  force  in  several  ways, 
by  revolving  the  loop  of  the  wire,  by  moving  the  loop,  or  by 
moving  the  magnet.  The  result  is  the  same  in  all  cases. 
That  is,  if  a  conducting  circuit  be  placed  in  a  magnetic 
field,  and  by  any  means  whatever  the  lines  of  force  thread- 
ing through  it  be  changed,  an  electric  pressure  is  caused  in 
the  circuit,  and  the  electric  pressure  is  proportional  to  the 
rate  of  change  of  the  number  of  lines  of  force. 

The  terms,  pressure  and  current,  have  much  the  same 
relation  to  electricity  that  they  have  to  water  pressure 
and  flow  of  water.  When  considering  fluids,  the  pressure 
was  found  to  be  proportional  to  the  depth.  If  a  long 
horizontal  pipe  be  tapped  into  the  bottom  of  a  water-tower 
or  stand  pipe  and  the  opposite  end  be  left  open  the  flow 
of  water  depends  upon  the  pressure  and  the  size  of  the 
pipe,  that  is,  upon  the  resistance  it  offers  to  the  current. 
The  pressure  gauge  also  shows  a  fall  in  pressure  from  the 
end  at  the  tower  along  the  pipe  to  the  open  end.  The  rate 


132 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


of  flow  is  the  same  in  all  parts  of  the  pipe  but  the  pressure 
falls.  The  same  terms,  pressure  and  current,  are  applied 
to  electricity.  The  pressure  may  also  be  called  potential, 
Electro-Motive  Force,  or  (E.M.F.).  The  fall  in  potential 
along  a  conductor  may  be  called  line  drop  or  difference  in 
potential.  In  discussing  the  loop  of  wire  it  is  important 
to  state  that  the  pressure  is  proportional  to  the  rate  of 
change  in  the  number  of  lines  of  force;  the  current  depends 
both  upon  the  pressure  and  the  opposition  to  its  flow  or 
resistance. 

In   Fig.   101    a  magnetic   field  is  shown  with  lines  of 
force  running  from  north  pole  to  south  pole  through  a 

rectangle  of  wire  which 
may  be  turned  by  a 
crank.  If  the  loop  is  re- 
volved toward  the  right, 
the  number  of  lines  of 
force  through  it  will  fall 
to  zero.  Then  as  the 
loop  revolves  farther  the 


FIG.  101. 
If  the  loop  of  wire  revolves,  the  num- 


ber of  lines  of  force  through 
changed;  in  other  words,  it  cuts  the 
lines  of  force.  This  cutting  of  the 
lines  of  force  develops  an  electrical  pres- 
sure. Since  the  invention  of  the  Edi- 
son dynamo  in  1881,  most  of  the  elec- 
tricity used  is  generated  by  this  process. 


lines  of  force  will  pass 
it  is  through  in  the  opposite 
direction  and  increase 
until  all  the  lines  run 
through  in  the  opposite 
direction.  They  will  fall 
again  to  zero  and  in- 
crease to  the  full  number,  as  in  the  figure,  when  the  rect- 
angle has  made  a  complete  revolution.  The  effect  would 
be  exactly  the  same  if  the  loop  of  wire  were  held  stationary 
and  the  magnets  revolved  about  the  loop  so  that  the  lines 
of  force  passed  through  the  loop  first  in  one  direction  and 
then  the  other.  We  have  said  that  the  electric  pressure 
developed  is  proportional  to  the  rate  of  change  of  the 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY  133 

number  of  lines  of  force.  Careful  observation  of  the 
rectangle  will  show  that  the  change  of  lines  of  force  is 
first  one  way  and  then  the  other,  and  both  mathematical 
demonstrations  and  experimental  measurements  show  that 
the  electric  pressure  follows  the  same  change  as  in  Fig.  102, 
that  is,  a  pressure  first  in  one  direction  and  then  the  other 
following  wave  lines  as  in  Fig.  102.  Such  a  current,  first  in 
one  direction  and  then  the  other,  is  called  an  alternating 
current  or  A.C.  If  wires  are  connected  to  the  ends  of 


FIG.  102.  FIG.  103. 

The  pressure  generated  in  the  loop  of  Fig.  101  follows  the  sine  curve 
shown  in  Fig.  102.  It  is  proportional  to  the  rate  of  cutting  lines  of 
force  at  each  point  of  the  revolution.  The  commutator  changes  the 
direction  of  each  negative  loop  as  in  Fig.  103. 

the  rectangle  by  slip  rings  and  led  away  to  form  a  circuit, 
the  .wire  would  carry  A.C.  electricity.  Such  a  current  is 
used  for  ordinary  incandescent  lighting.  We  will  later 
study  the  advantages  and  disadvantages  of  A.C.  distri- 
bution. 

If  two  pieces  of  copper  are  attached  to  the  ends  of  a 
loop  and  two  brushes  set  to  slide  on  the  pieces  of  copper 
as  shown  in  Fig.  101,  in  such  a  way  that  just  as  the 
current  is  about  to  reverse  in  the  loop  each  brush  slides  over 
onto  the  other  piece  of  copper,  the  current  in  the  outside 
wire  will  flow  in  the  same  direction  it  did  before  and  will  be 
like  the  line  in  Fig.  103.  This  current,  since  it  is  all  in  one 


134 


APPLIED   PHYSICS 


direction,  is  called  a  direct  current  or  D.C.     If  more  loops 

are  put  on  so  that  while 
the  current  of  one  loop  is 
low,  another  loop  is  sup- 
plying the  needed  pressure, 
the  curve  becomes  that  of 
Fig.  104  and  we  have  a 

D.C.    generator   such   as   is   used  to   supply   current   for 

motors  and  lights  of  this  building. 

The  magnets  supplying  the  lines  of  force  are  field  magnets. 


FIG.  104. 


FIG.  105.  —  Dissectible  Hand  Dynamo. 

The  loop  of  wire  is  revolved  at  high  speed  (3500  R.P.M.)  between 
the  poles  of  a  strong  magnet.  A  soft  iron  core  insures  a  large  number 
of  lines  of  force  for  the  conductor  to  cut. 


MAGNETISM    AND  ELECTRICITY  135 

The  pieces  of  copper  for  changing  or  commuting  the  cur- 
rent to  make  it  direct  are  the  commutator. 

The  loop  of  wire  in  which  the  electric  pressure  is  developed 
is  called  the  armature.  Either  field  or  armature  may 
be  revolved.  The  electric  pressure  is  commonly  called 


FIG.  106.  —  300  Horse-power  B.C.  Dynamo. 

One  of  two  used  at  Technical  High  School,  Cleveland.  This  ma- 
chine makes  600  R.P.M.,  and  at  each  revolution  each  conductor  cuts 
the  lines  in  front  of  14  poles. 

electro-motive  force  or  E.M.F.  and  is  measured  in  volts 
which  we  will  define  later.  The  quantity  of  current  set 
up  is  measured  in  amperes  which  we  will  also  define  later. 

A  magnetic  needle  comes  to  rest  with  its  north  pole 
pointing  almost  north.  If  a  wire  carrying  an  electric 
current  is  brought  down  near  it  and  parallel  to  the  needle 


136 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


as  in  Fig.  107,  the  needle  will  swing  from  its  former  position 
and  come  to  rest  at  an  angle  to  the  wire.     If  the  direction 

v  of  the  current  in  the  wire  is 

reversed,  the  needle  will  be 
deflected  in  the  opposite  di- 
rection. We  speak  of  the 
direction  of  the  current  as 
though  we  knew.  Electric- 
ity may  be  some  sort  of  a 
strain  in  ether  and  when 
that  strain  is  transmitted 
from  one  point  to  another 


FIG.  107. 


The  copper  is  non-magnetic,  but 
when  a  current  of  electricity  flows 
over  the  wire  the  needle  tends  to 
turn  at  right  angles  to  the  wire. 
This  shows  a  magnetic  field  about 
a  current  of  electricity. 


one 

we  call  the  connecting  sub- 
stance which  distributed  the 
strain  a  conductor,  and  not  knowing  any  better  term  to  use, 
we  call  the  flow  of  electricity 
a  current.  For  convenience 
in  studying  some  of  the  ap- 
plications we  say  the  current 
flows  from  the  positive  (+) 
to  the  negative  ( — )  side.  It 
must  be  understood  that  this 
is  only  a  convention,  al- 
though a  useful  one.  With 
the  wire  above  the  needle  as 


FIG.  108. 
Concentric   rings   show   the  field 


shown,  if  the  right  hand  is 

brought  down  with  the  palm 

of  the  hand  toward  the  wire  around  a  wire  carrying  a  current  of 

and  the  fingers  pointing  in 

the  direction  of  the  current, 

the  extended  thumb  indicates  which  way  the  north  end 

of  the  needle  will  move. 

The  above  results  lead  us  to  suppose  that  there  is  some 
magnetic  field  around  the  wire  when  the  current  is  flowing. 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY  137 

To  test  this  we  run  the  wire  through  a  piece  of  paper  and 
scatter  iron  filings  around  it.  When  a  current  flows 
though  the  wire,  the  filings  arrange  themselves  in  con- 
centric rings  about  the  wire  as  a  center.  These  rings 
show  lines  of  force  in  the  space  about  the  current,  Fig.  108. 
Grasp  the  wire  with  the  right  hand  with  the  thumb  in  the 
direction  of  the  current  and  the  fingers  will  show  the  direc- 
tion of  the  lines  of  force.  Make  a  helix  or  coil  of  the 
wire  as  in  Fig.  109  and  apply  the  same  rule  for  grasping 


FIG.  109. 

the  wire  and  we  will  find  that  the  lines  of  force  of  each  turn 
of  wire  tend  to  strengthen  those  of  the  others.  Grasp  the 
coil  with  the  right  hand  with  the  fingers  along  the  wires  in 
the  direction  of  the  current  and  the  thumb  will  indicate 
the  north  pole.  When  studying  the  magnetic  field,  it 
was  found  that  the  lines  of  force  pass  through  iron  much 
more  readily  than  through  air,  and  we  find  by  experiment 
that  if  a  soft  iron  core  be  placed  in  the  coil  of  Fig.  109,  a 
current  which  would  before  produce  only  a  few  lines  of 
force  will  produce  a  large  number  through  the  iron,  and  a 
strong  magnet  will  result,  see  Fig.  110.  This  is  an  electro 


138 


APPLIED   PHYSICS 


magnet.  We  shall  now  take  up  some  of  its  applications, 
which  cover  a  large  part  of  the  field  of  applied  electricity. 
When  a  current  of  electricity  flows  through  the  wire 
coil  or  helix  described  in  the  last  paragraph,  the  coil  be- 
comes a  magnet  with  a  north  pole  and  a  south  pole,  like 
any  other  magnet.  When  a  core  of  soft  steel  is  inserted 
through  the  helix  the  strength  of  the  magnet  is  greatly 
increased,  for  the  reason  that  the  soft  iron  lets  the  lines  of 

force  pass  through  more 
readily  than  the  same 
space  containing  wood 
or  air  or  any  other  non- 
magnetic substance. 
Soft  iron  is  more  per- 
meable than  hard  steel; 
hence  while  the  current 
flows,  the  soft  iron  core 
is  a  stronger  magnet 
than  the  hard  steel.  As 
soon  as  the  current  is 
turned  off  the  soft  iron 
loses  most  of  its  mag- 
netism. The  Morse 
telegraph  instrument  de- 
pends upon  this  principle.  A  bar  of  soft  iron  is  held  in 
place  above  an  electro  magnet  by  a  spring.  The  electro 
magnet  is  connected  to  a  circuit  from  a  distant  station 
where  a  current  is  furnished  either  by  a  dynamo  or  a 
battery.  As  the  earth  is  a  good  conductor  the  return 
wire  may  be  replaced  by  the  earth.  Any  wire  offers  some 
resistance  to  the  flow  of  an  electric  current,  so  the  cur- 
rent carried  by  a  wire  for  long  distances  is  too  small 
to  make  the  sounder  work  as  well  as  it  should.  There- 
fore, a  relay  is  put  in  and  acts  as  a  key  to  work  a  local 


FIG.  110. 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY 


139 


2 

1 

.3 


140 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


* 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY 


141 


circuit.     The    connection   for   the   sending   and   receiving 
station  is  then  as  in  Fig.  114. 

The  key  at   Chicago  is  pressed  and  the  current  flows 
through   each   relay  on  the   circuit   and   each   sounder  is 


FIG.  113. —  Lifting  Magnet. 
Two  tons  of  scrap  iron  are  transferred  at 
each  lift  by  this  magnet. 

pulled  down  and  held  as  long  as  the  sending  key  is  pressed. 
Dots  and  dashes  are  used  to  represent  letters. 

TEC         HNICAL 


spells  Technical. 


142 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


The  door  bell  is  also  an  application  of  the  etactro  magnet. 
The  circuit  is  wired  as  in  Fig.  115.  When  the  key  or  but- 
ton K  is  pressed,  the  circuit  is  completed  and  the  current 
flows  through  the  electro  magnet  m,  pulling  the  armature 
up  and  striking  the  bell.  At  the  same  time  the  circuit  is 
broken  at  0,  the  current  stops,  m  is  no  longer  a  magnet 


FIG.  114.  —  Morse  telegraph  Circuit. 

Chicago  sending.     Every  time  this  key  is  pressed  every  relay  and 
every  sounder  on  this  line  clicks  the  same  signal. 

and  the  soft  iron  armature  falls  back  to  B  and  the  process 
is  repeated,  ringing  the  bell  as  long  as  the  button  is  pressed. 
The  contacts  in  K  and  0  are  likely  to  get  dirty  or  covered 
with  oxide  and  prevent  the  working  of  the  bell.  They 
should  then  be  scraped  clean.  If  the  battery  is  composed 
of  dry  cells,  they  will  need  replacing  occasionally,  or  if  a 
sal-ammoniac  battery  is  used,  the  solution  will  need  renew- 
ing when  exhausted.  Aside  from  this  slight  attention  the 
bell  needs  no  care. 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY 


143 


FIG.  115. —  Electric  Bell.l 


We  will  now  take  up  the  study  of  another  application 

of  the  electro  magnet,  the  motor,  which  is  much  in  evi- 

dence   every    day.      In    the    instrument    known    as    the 

D'Arsonval   galvanometer,    a 

coil  of  wire  is  suspended  by 

a  tape  of  phosphor-bronze  so 

that  the  coil  hangs  between 

the    poles    of    a    permanent 

magnet  with  the  axis  of  the 

coil    at   right    angles   to    the 

lines  of  force  of  the  field  in 

which   it    hangs,    as   in    Fig. 

116.     A  spring  below  the  coil 

serves  as  a  conductor  to  com- 

plete the  circuit  and  also  to 

hold  the  coil  in  place.     When 

a  current  is  sent  through  the  coil  it  becomes  a  magnet, 

according  to  the  law  of  magnets  ;  the  north  pole  is  attracted 

by  the  south  pole  of  the  permanent  magnet  and  repelled 

by  the  north  pole.  The 
south  pole  of  the  coil  is 
pulled  in  the  opposite 
direction  so  that  the 
coil  swings  about  in  its 
field,  and  the  amount 
of  the  deflection  de- 
pends on  the  strength 
of  the  current.  If  the 
current  is  strong  enough 
the  coil  will  turn  at 

right  angles  to  its  first  position  or  until  its  north  pole  is 

toward  the  south  pole  of  the  magnet.     If  the  current  con- 

tinues to  flow  in  the  same  direction  and  the  coil  is  turned 

beyond  this  position,  the  magnetic  drag  will  stop  it  and 


FIG 


144 


APPLIED   PHYSICS 


FIG.  118. 

The  D' Arson val  Galvanometer  as  used 
in  the  D.C.  Voltmeter.  The  movable 
coil  is  carried  on  jewel  bearings.  The 
scale  is  read  in  volts. 


FIG.  117.  —  Galvanometer.         I 


The  frame  is  a  strong  per- 
manent magnet.  The  coil  is 
copper  wire  wound  on  a  brass 
frame.  It  is  non-magnetic  ex- 
cept when  a  current  of  elec- 
tricity passes  through  it,  then 
it  indicates  the  current  by 
turning  toward  one  side. 


FIG.  119.  —  Section  of  the  D'Arson- 
val  Galvanometer,  used  as  a  Voltmeter. 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY 


145 


FIG.  120. 
Weston  Voltmeter  and  Ammeter,  galvanometers  with  other  names. 


FIG.  121.  —  Switch  Board. 

Voltmeters  and  ammeters  in  use  on  a  distributing  switch  board. 
11 


146 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


bring  it  back.  If  the  current  is  reversed  just  as  the 
coil  reaches  the  position  where  it  would  stop,  the  in- 
ertia carries  it  beyond;  the  magnetism  of  the  coil  being 


Potential    '" 
Coil*. 

001 

^V  Spring 

HH! 

HH 

\\r\f\-Cmient 

JO(T  c°" 

Lamps 

Resistance 

FIG.  122.  —  Direct  Reading  Wattmeter. 

The  current  coil  carries  the  current  while  the  potential  coil 
carries  a  current  proportional  to  the  pressure.  The  reaction 
between  the  two  measures  the  product  of  the  volts  times  the 
amperes,  thus  it  is  read  in  watts. 

reversed,  the  permanent  magnet  swings  it  on  the  rest 
of  the  turn.  If  this  were  continued  with  a  galva- 
nometer, it  would  soon  twist 
off  the  supporting  tape.  By 
putting  the  coil  on  bearings 
and  making  the  electric  con- 
nection through  brushes  and 
commutator  as  in  the  dynamo 
shown  in  Fig.  101,  the  cur- 
rent is  carried  to  the  coil  by 
a  sliding  contact.  The  mag- 
netism of  the  coil  is  reversed 
at  the  proper  time  to  keep  it 


FIG.  123.  —  Toy  Motor. 


Again  the  principle  of  the     gomg     and    we    have   the    prin_ 
galvanometer  is  applied,  al-       .      °  . 

though  the  name  is  changed,     ciple    of    the    common    direct 

current    motor    such    as    run 
the  street  cars  of  the  city. 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY 


147 


Do  not  fail  to  note  that  in  the  electro  magnet  there 
are    two   distinct    circuits:   the   electric   circuit,  which   is 
of  copper  wire,  with  each  turn  insulated  from  the  iron 
core   and  also   from   the   other 
turns;    and    the    magnetic    cir- 
cuit, which  is  of  soft  iron,  and 
should   have   as  little  air  gape 
as  possible  for  the  lines  of  force 
to  pass  through,  since  iron  will 
allow  many  more  lines  of  force 
to   pass   for   the   same   current 
than  will  air. 

The  field  magnets  of  the  dy- 
namo and  of  the  motor  are 
usually  electro  magnets  and  in 
the  dynamo  may  be  energized 
by  a  current  from  the  dynamo  FIG.  124.  —  Series  Dynamo, 
itself  (self  excited)  or  by  current 

from    another    source    (separately    excited).      When    the 
field  of  a  dynamo  is  connected,  as  in  Fig.   124,  so  that 
the  current  all  runs  through  the  field,  then  through  the 
load  and  back  to  the  other  brush, 
it  is  "  series  wound  "  and  large  wire 
must    be   used.     With   the   external 
circuit    open    such    a    field    has    no 
current  through  it,  and  if  volts  are 
plotted  on  one  axis  and  amperes  on 
the    other   the   voltage   starts   at   a 
very  low  point,  as  a,   Fig.   125.     If 
more  load  is  now  added  to  the  ex- 
ternal   circuit    by    turning   on   more   lamps,   the  voltage 
builds    up    along    the    curved    line    ab.      If    the   field   is 
connected  so  that  the  current  opposes  the  residual  mag- 
netism,   the    series    dynamo    will    fail    to    build   up   and 


Amperes 
FIG.  125. 


148 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


will  follow  the  dotted  line  ax.  If  a  series  dynamo  fails 
to  "pick  up"  when  the  contacts  are  all  tight,  it  is  usually 
necessary  to  reverse  the  field. 


Battery,  A  pair 
of  lines  for 
each  cell. 


D.C.  Dynamo 
or  Generator. 


D.C.  Motor. 


A.C.  Dynamo 
or  Generator. 


Field  of  Shunt  D.C. 
Dynamo. 


Field  of  Series 
D.C.  Dynamo. 


Resistance  Box. 


M/WV&WW 

Variable  Resistance 
or  Rheostat. 


}T 

Voltmeter. 


Ammeter. 


Galvanometer. 


Transformer. 


-O- 


Incandescent  Lamp.  Arc  Lamp. 

FIG.  126.  —  Symbols  Used  in  Electrical  Diagrams. 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY 


149 


In  Fig.  127,  the  connection  is  shown  for  the  "  shunt 
dynamo."  Whenever  an  electric  circuit  is  connected  so 
that  the  current  may  divide 
and  flow  through  two  paths, 
the  connection  is  called  shunt 
or  parallel.  In  the  shunt 
dynamo  the  current  divides  at 
one  brush,  part  going  through 
the  field  to  the  other  brush 
and  part  through  the  external 
circuit  back  to  the  second 
brush.  If  this  generator  be 
run  at  a.  constant  speed,  the 
highest  voltage  will  be  reached 

when  there  is  no  external  load 

,     „     ,  .  ,  FIG.  127.  —  Shunt  Dynamo, 

and  all  the  current  is  used  to 

excite  the  field.  As  the  external  load  is  increased  the 
voltage  will  drop  along  the  curved  line  ab,  Fig.  128.  Note 
from  this  curve  that  the  shunt  machine  fails  completely 
under  too  heavy  a  load.  A  resistance  in  series  with  the 


Series 


O         Amperes 
FIG.  128. 


FIG.  129.  —  Compound  Dynamo. 


field  must  be  put  in  to  adjust  the  field  strength  as  the  load 
is  thrown  in.  For  lighting  and  power  purposes  a  con- 
stant voltage,  usually  110  or  220  or  500,  is  wanted  at  all 
loads.  In  the  series  machine  the  voltage  rises  higher  as 
more  lamps  are  thrown  in,  while  in  the  shunt  machine, 
unless  an  operator  stands  constantly  at  the  regulator  to 


150 


APPLIED   PHYSICS 


regulate  it,  the  voltage  falls  as  more  lights  are  cut  in. 
Fig.  129  shows  a  connection  in  common  use  where  both 


External  Circuit 

WWWWM 

FIG.  130.  —  Short  Shunt  and  Long  Shunt, 
Compound  Dynamo. 


series  and  shunt  windings  on  the  same  magnets  are  used, 
and  one  picks  up  as  the  other  decreases  so  that  the  voltage 

remains  constant,  as  is  shown  by 
the  dotted  line  ab,  Fig.  131.  This 
machine  is  self  regulating  and  is 
compound  wound.  The  greater 
part  of  the  electric  power  gene- 
rated and  distributed  to-day  is 
AC,  but  in  order  to  define  the 
units  used,  we  will  now  take  up 


__Compqund_ 


Amperes 
FlG.  131. 


a  brief  study  of  the  chemical  relation  of  the  electric  cur- 
rent before  studying  the  alternator  and  transformer. 

THE  CHEMICAL  RELATION  OF  AN  ELECTRICAL  CURRENT 

Experiments  in  the  chemistry  course  have  demonstrated 
that  pure  water  is  a  non-conductor  of  electric  currents. 
When  a  little  H2S04  is  added  to  the  H20  in  dilute  solution 
the  electric  current  passes  readily  through  it.  Many  salts 
in  solution  produce  the  same  effect.  It  is  supposed  that 
when  a  salt  is  in  the  solution  some  of  the  molecules  are 
separated  into  atoms  or  groups  of  atoms,  each  with  a  small 
quantity  of  electricity,  together  called  ions.  Until  recently 


MAGNETISM  AND  ELECTRICITY 


151 


this  was  mere  theory  with  little  to  prove  it,  but  within 
the  last  year  no  less  than  six  different  experimenters  have 
actually  measured  the  quantity  of  electricity  carried  on 
the  atom  and  the  results  by  all  these  methods  are  about 
the  same.  When  an  electric  current  passes  through  an 
electrolyte  (as  the  solu- 
tion is  called),  these  ions 
pass  across  from  one  wire 
to  the  other  through  the 
solution  and  each  carries 
its  little  load  of  electric- 
ity and  dumps  it  just 
as  a  laborer  pushes  his 
wheelbarrow  load  of  sand 
and  dumps  it  onto  a  pile. 
A  good  union  man  will 
push  only  a  certain  size 
load  and  will  refuse  to 
move  if  he  has  one  extra  FIG.  132.  —  Electrolytic  Cell, 
shovelful.  These  ions  are  When  a  current  is  forced  through  the 
the  best  union  men  there  9ell,the  electrolyte  is  broken  up  and  Cu 

is  plated  on  the  cathode, 
are,   as   every   univalent 

atom  carries  exactly  a  certain  amount  of  electricity,  no 
more,  no  less,  and  every  divalent  atom  carries  twice  as 
much  and  they  never  make  a  mistake. 

When  the  ends  of  two  wires  connected  to  an  electric 
circuit  are  placed  in  an  electrolyte  the  circuit  is  completed 
through  the  solution  and  the  ends  are  called  the  electrodes. 
Sometimes  they  are  called  anode  (the  way  in)  and  cathode 
(the  way  out).  The  electrolytic  cell  of  Fig.  132  is  shown 
connected  to  an  electric  circuit  with  pressure  enough  to 
drive  the  current  through  the  direction  shown.  The  action 
all  appears  at  the  electrodes  and  not  in  the  solution  between. 
The  Cu  atom  with  its  charge  migrates  to  the  plate  C, 


"^\ 

Annode 
S04 
At  Plate 
A 

~\ 

A 

T— 

ode 
Deposited 
onC 

Sgi 

MQ 
-ivti 

t^~" 

i 

V 

^ 

152  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

where  it  gives  up  its  charge  and  is  deposited  as  copper  on 
the  plate.  The  SCX  ion  migrates  to  the  other  plate  and  is 
liberated  at  plate  A .  If  A  is  of  copper  the  sulphion  radical 
attacks  it  and  forms  Cu  SCX.  If  A  is  a  platinum  plate  the 
sulphion  ion  will  take  H2  from  the  water  and  liberate  O 
at  plate  A. 

If  platinum  plates  are  used  and  the  electrolyte  is  H2SO4, 
the  H  ion  migrates  to  the  cathode,  deposits  its  charge 
and  is  liberated  as  free  hydrogen.  The  SCX  ion  migrates 
to  the  other  plate,  and  since  it  cannot  act  on  platinum  it 
attacks  the  H2O,  taking  out  H2,  and  forming  H2SO4,  liber- 
ating O.  The  H2S04  therefore  remains  the  same  in  quan- 
tity while  H2O  is  used. 

Electro  plating  is  done  by  the  method  shown  above. 
In  Fig.  132,  C  will  be  copper  plated.  If  the  electrolyte  is 
a  solution  of  silver  salt  and  A  is  a  silver  bar,  the  plate 
C  will  be  silver  plated.  The  silver  and  nickel  plating 
industry  is  of  great  commercial  importance  in  the  manu- 
facturing world  to-day.  Much  of  the  printing  of  to-day 
is  done  by  electrotype. 

The  type  is  set  and  an  impression  made  in  wax.  The 
face  of  the  wax  impression  is  covered  by  a  thin  layer  of 
graphite  to  make  it  conducting  and  then  plated  by  a  layer 
of  metal  a  little  thicker  than  paper.  This  would  be  too 
thin  to  use  in  the  press,  so  it  is  " backed"  by  pouring  on 
melted  type  metal.  The  electrotype  plates  so  made  are 
an  exact  copy  of  the  type  and  may  be  used  to  print,  while 
the  type  is  distributed  and  set  up  again. 

We  have  pointed  out  that  a  univalent  atom  always 
carries  the  same  quantity  of  electricity.  That  is,  the 
quantity  of  an  element  deposited  by  a  current  passing 
through  an  electrolyte  is  directly  proportional  to  the 
quantity  of  electricity  passing  through  it.  In  dealing  with 
the  flow  of  electricity,  through  an  acid  for  instance,  the 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY  153 

quantity  of  hydrogen  deposited  is  independent  of  the 
kind  of  acid  and  its  concentration,  but  depends  on  the 
quantity  of  electricity  only.  If  the  same  quantity  of 
electricity  is  passed  through  different  electrolytes  the 
quantity  of  the  substance  deposited  is  proportional  to  the 
atomic  weight  for  a  univalent  element.  Each  atom  carries 
the  same  quantity  every  time.  This  fact  furnishes  a 
means  of  defining  the  unit  current.  The  cathode  is  weighed, 
and  then  after  an  electric  current  has  been  passed  for  a 
given  time,  the  increase  in  weight  will  indicate  exactly  how 
much  electricity  has  gone  through  the  circuit.  The  Inter- 
national Congress  defined  the  ampere  as:  "The  constant 
current  which  will  deposit  0.001118  grams  of  silver  or 
0.0003287  grams  of  copper  in  one  second."  This  is  4.025 
grams  of  silver  per  hour. 

The  same  congress  defined  the  ohm  as  "The  resistance 
offered  to  a  constant  current  by  a  column  of  mercury  at 
the  temperature  of  melting  ice,  14.4521  grams  in  mass  of 
a  constant  cross  section  and  106.3  cm-  m  length." 

It  defined  the  volt  as  "  That  electric  pressure  which 
will  force  a  current  of  one  ampere  over  a  resistance  of  one 
ohm." 

A  watt  is  the  power  to  supply  one  ampere  with  a  pres- 
sure of  one  volt.  These  international  units  are  those  used 
in  common  electric  practice  in  this  country.  The  unit 
used  in  selling  electricity  is  the  kilowatt-hour,  that  is, 
1000  watts  for  one  hour  (746  watts  are  equal  to  one  horse- 
power, that  is,  one  kilowatt  is  equal  to  about  1.3  horse- 
power). 

BATTERIES 

There  are  a  large  number  of  battery  cells  but  we  will 
here  consider  only  a  few,  the  simplest  voltaic  cell  and  the 
one  representative  of  each  of  the  types  of  cells  in  most  com- 


154  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

mon  use.  As  the  simple  voltaic  cell  will  be  studied  with  some 
care  in  the  laboratory,  this  description  may  be  brief.  A 
simple  voltaic  cell  may  be  made  of  a  glass  of  salt  water,  a 
piece  each  of  zinc,  copper,  and  wire.  Usually  a  diluted  solu- 
tion (about  one  part  in  twenty)  of  H2S04  is  used.  When 
these  are  not  connected  a  few  bubbles  will  rise  from  the  zinc. 
If  the  zinc  plate  is  amalgamated  with  mercury  no  action 
will  take  place.  If  now  the  two  strips  are  connected  by 
a  conductor,  bubbles  will  rise  freely  from  the  copper  strip. 
A  test  will  show  that  these  bubbles  are  hydrogen,  that  an 
electric  current  is  flowing  along  the  wire,  and  that  the  zinc 
is  used  up,  that  is,  changed  to  ZnSO4.  The  electric  current 
is  set  up  at  the  expense  of  the  chemical  energy.  The  action 
of  the  ions  is  similar  to  that  of  the  electrolitic  cell  described, 
but  in  the  opposite  direction.  If  the  zinc  is  not  amal- 
gamated, the  action  goes  on  at  the  zinc  plate  between  points 
of  different  degrees  of  purity  independently  of  the  electric 
circuit.  Such  wasting  of  the  zinc  is  called  local  action. 

If  undisturbed,  hydrogen  bubbles  soon  coat  the  copper 
plate  and  oppose  the  flow  of  the  current.  Often  this  polar- 
ization nearly  stops  the  action  of  the  battery. 

OPEN  CIRCUIT  BATTERIES 

There  are  two  batteries  (the  NH4C1  cell  and  the  dry 
cell)  in  common  use,  which  if  used  continuously  for  a  short 
time  will  polarize.  If  connected  to  a  lamp  or  a  small 
motor  they  will  work  for  a  short  time  until  the  collection 
of  hydrogen  stops  the  action.  The  battery  must  then 
rest  while  the  hydrogen  disappears.  On  a  door  bell  cir- 
cuit which  is  closed  only  occasionally  and  then  for  a  short 
time  such  a  cell  is  all  right,  and  for  that  reason  is  called  an 
open  circuit  battery.  The  NH4C1,  ammonium  chloride  or 
sal-ammoniac  cell,  is  made  by  placing  in  a  glass  jar  a  solu- 
tion of  NH4C1,  and  in  this  a  carbon  with  a  large  fluted 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY 


155 


surface  and  a  heavy  piece  of  zinc  are  placed.  The  large 
surface  of  the  carbon  reduces  the  speed  of  polarization. 
Often  the  carbon  is  hollow  and  packed  with  graphite  and 
MnC>2,  to  further  absorb  the  hydrogen. 

In  the  dry  battery  the  zinc  is  the  jacket  of  the  cell  and 
the  electrolyte  is  made  into  a  paste  and  the  whole  sealed 
by  covering  with  wax.  The  basis  is 
usually  NH4C1.  If  the  cell  is  not  used 
it  dries  out  until  the  resistance  of  the 
paste  becomes  so  large  that  no  current 
'flows.  Until  the  zinc  is  used  up,  such  a 
cell  may  be  renewed  by  injecting  a  weak 
solution  of  NH4C1  or  dilute  HC1. 

CLOSED   CIRCUIT   BATTERIES 

The  cells  described  in  the  last  para- 
graph work  well  on  the  open  circuit  sys- 
tem, but  in  closed  circuit  work  such  as 
running  motors,  small  electric  lights,  or 
for  commercial  telegraph  work,  polariza- 
tion renders  them  useless.  Polarization 
is  the  deposit  of  hydrogen  about  one  of 
the  electrodes.  In  several  cells  such 
chemicals  are  used  that  some  other  sub- 
stance is  deposited  and  polarization  is 
prevented.  Fig.  134  shows  the  gravity 
cell  used  in  commercial  telegraph  sys- 
tems. A  strip  of  copper  is  placed  at 
the  bottom  in  a  saturated  solution  of 
CuSCX  and  near  the  top  a  heavy  piece 
of  zinc  is  suspended  in  a  dilute  solution 
of  ZnSO4.  The  heavier  solution  is  at 
the  bottom  so  that  gravity  retards  dif- 
fusion. Some  of  the  molecules  of  the 


FIG.  133.  —  Section 
of  a  Dry  Cell. 

The  zinc  container 
is  one  electrode.  It 
is  separated  from 
the  carbon  by  a 
paste  containing 
ammonium-chloride. 
The  carbon  elec- 
trode is  packed  in  a 
mixture  of  carbon 
and  manganese  di- 
oxide. 

zinc  sulphate  are 


156 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


ionized  and  the  -SO4  ion  migrates  toward  the  zinc,  deposits 
its  charge,  and  forms  new  ZnSCU,  while  the  Zn  ion  migrates 
toward  the  other  electrode,  meets  the  CuSO4  and  displaces 
a  Cu  ion.  This  migrates  to  the  copper  plate  and  is  de- 
posited as  metallic  copper,  while  its  charge  is  given  to  the 
copper  electrode.  As  the  cell  is  used  the  zinc  "crowfoot"  is 
consumed,  the  solution  of  zinc  sulphate  becomes  more 
concentrated,  the  copper  sulphate  becomes  dilute,  and  the 
copper  plate  grows  by  deposit  of  pure  copper.  New 

"  blue  rock  "  must  be  added 
and  the  zinc  sulphate  solution 
must  be  diluted  to  keep  the 
cell  in  good  condition.  To 
prevent  diffusion  the  circuit 
must  be  kept  closed. 

The  cell  just  described  has 
so  many  advantages  in  the 
way  of  furnishing  a  constant 
pressure,  while  being  used  to 
furnish  a  constant  current, 
that  a  portable  form  is  desired. 
The  result  is  the  Daniel  Cell. 
FIG.  134.  —  Gravity  Cell.  Exactly  the  same  materials  are 

This  is  a  closed  circuit  cell,    used,  but  the  zinc  is  placed  in 
Used  in  telegraph  work.  a  poroug    ^    containing    the 

zinc  sulphate  and  the  cell  may  be  carried  about.  The 
action  is  the  same  as  in  the  gravity  cell. 

The  storage  battery  is  one  of  great  importance  in  the 
present  age  of  electricity.  A  home-made  storage  cell  for 
every  boy  is  shown  in  Fig.  135.  Any  glass  jar  may  be  used. 
A  small  one  may  be  made  in  a  ordinary  drinking  glass. 
Two  lead  plates  fastened  by  wires  to  the  sides  of  a  stick  of 
wood  are  suspended  in  a  10%  to  20%  solution  of  H2S04. 
If  A  and  B  are  connected  to  a  suitable  source  of  elec- 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY 


157 


tricity  a  current  will  flow  through  the  electrolyte  and 
hydrogen  will  escape  at  the  negative  plate,  but  the  oxygen, 
instead  of  escaping  at  the  positive  plates,  unites  with  the 
lead  forming  a  brown-colored  coat  of  PbC>2.  After  the 
electrolysis  has  been  carried  on  for  a  time  the  circuit  may 
be  disconnected  and  a  bell,  if  connected,  will  ring.  Test  will 
show  the  current  going  through 
the  cell  in  the  opposite  direc- 
tion. While  the  discharge  is 
going  on  the  lead  peroxide 
formed  during  the  charge  is 
reduced  to  soft  sponge  metallic 
lead,  while  some  lead  sulphate 
is  formed  on  the  other  plate. 
When  the  cell  is  charged  again 
the  hydrogen  reduces  this  lead 
sulphate  to  spongy  lead.  Two 
plates  like  those  shown  will 
not  take  a  very  large  charge, 
as  only  a  small  amount  of  the 
"active  material"  will  be  held 
by  each  plate.  After  several 
charges  the  cell  will  work  bet- 
ter than  'at  first,  as  more  of 
the  plate  has  been  changed  to 
the  active  spongy  form. 

When  the  cell  is  being 
charged,  just  as  much  electric- 
ity comes  out  at  the  negative 
plate  as  goes  in  at  the  positive 
plate.  No  electricity  is  stored 


FIG.  135.  —  Toy  Storage  Cell. 

Forcing  a  current  of  electric- 
ity through  this  cell  stores  up 
chemical  energy.  This  chemical 
energy  may  afterwards  be  used  to 
generate  an  electric  current. 


in  the  cell,  but  some  of  the  energy  is  retained  as  chemical 
energy.  When  water  runs  down  through  a  water-wheel  as 
much  water  comes  out  as  goes  in,  but  the  wheel  takes 


158 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


some  of  the  energy  out.     So  the  storage  cell  takes  some 
of  the  energy  out  but  does  not  store  the  electricity. 

The  commercial  storage  cell  has  plates  of  lead  bars  (Fig. 
136),  between  which  are  pockets,  filled  with  a  paste  of  the 
active  material,  which  increases  the  capacity  but  not  the 
voltage.  The  internal  resistance  is  very  small,  hence  a 
storage  battery  must  not  be  short  circuited. 

The  lead  gridiron  plates  have  little  rigidity  and  buckle 
easily  if  they  are  heated  very  hot.  If  discharged  or  charged 
too  fast  the  plates  heat  and  buckle,  thus  short  circuiting 
the  cell  and  destroying  it.  The  jars  are  glass  or  hard 

rubber  and  easily  broken.  If 
the  battery  is  allowed  to  stand 
discharged  for  a  few  weeks,  the 
lead  sulphate  formed  on  one 
plate  during  discharge  hardens 
into  a  white  layer  which  inter- 
feres with  the  working  of  the 
cell.  Unless  the  cell  is  watched 
and  given  the  greatest  care  it 
soon  gets  out  of  order.  All  con- 
tacts and  metal  parts  near  the 
battery  must  be  lead  covered, 
to  protect  them  from  the  fine 
spray  of  H2SO4  which  is  carried 
into  the  air  by  the  escaping 
gases. 


FIG. 


Storage 


136.  —  Lead 
Battery. 

The  lead  grid  plate  con- 
tains the  paste  of  "active  ma- 
tenal"  m  its  pockets. 


Thomas  A.  Edison,  after  several  years'  constant  effort 
and  thousands  of  experiments,  nas  produced  a  storage 
battery  which  in  many  respects  is  far  ahead  of  the  lead 
storage  cell.  The  jar  is  of  nickle  plated  steel,  thus  doing 
away  with  breakage.  The  plates  have  a  frame  work  of 
steel  which  will  not  buckle  even  on  short  circuit.  The 
electrolyte  is  a  solution  of  KOH,  hence  no  corrosive  fumes 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY 


159 


are  formed.  One  plate  consists  of  a  gridiron  of  steel  with 
a  paste  of  iron  oxide  in  the  pockets.  The  other  plate  is  a 
frame  work  of  steel  carrying  steel  tubes  about  the  size  of 
small  lead  pencils.  These  tubes  are  perforated  and  contain 
alternate  layers  of  nickel  oxide  and  nickel,  the  nickel  being 
for  the  purpose  of 
making  the  mixture 
conducting.  Th.e 
battery  weighs  about 
half  as  much  as  the 
lead  battery  of  the 
same  capacity.  It 
is  free  from  corro- 
sive fumes,  is  almost 
non-breakable,  is  not 
injured  by  too  rapid 
discharge  nor  by 
standing  discharged. 
Its  rated  efficiency 
is  not  so  high  as  that 
of  the  lead  battery, 
but  in  practise  it  is 
so  difficult  to  keep 
the  lead  battery  in 
good  condition  that 
the  actual  working 
efficiency  is  usually 
higher.  The  pros- 
pect is  that  the  new 
battery  will  largely 
displace  the  old  in  a 
few  years.  Parts  are 
shown  in  Fig.  137. 

We  have  found  that  the  definition  of  the  volt  leads  us 


FIG.  137.  —  Electrodes  of  the  new  Edison 
Storage  Cell. 

One  nickle  plated  steel  plate  contains  iron 
oxide  in  the  pockets.  In  the  other  plate 
perforated  steel  tubes  contain  nickel  oxide. 


160 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


at  once  to  Ohm's  law  C  =  V/R,  which  may  also  be  stated 
V  =  CR  also  R  =  V/C.     This  gives  us  one  of  the  commonly 

used    practical     methods    of 

measuring 

voltmeter 


no  v 

Hh 


resistance.      The 
and   an   ammeter 

(g)       |  are  connected  over  the  resist- 

ance as   shown  in  Fig.   138. 
A  current  is  passed  through 
and  the   voltmeter  and    the 
FIG.  138.  ammeter  readings  are  taken 

Measuring  resistance  by  the  use     as  near  the  same  time  as  pos- 
of  voltmeter  and  ammeter.  ^^     Tfaen    foy   ohm>s   ^ 

R  =  V/C.  When  V  is  in  volts  and  C  in  amperes,  R  will  be 
in  ohms.  One  of  the  common  testing  boxes  which  the 
lineman  carries  with  him  is  based  on  the  principle  of  the 
Wheatstone's  bridge.  To 
understand  this  it  will  be 
necessary  to  consider  divided 
circuits,  which  may  be  called 
also  parallel  or  shunt  cir- 
cuits. 

In  Fig.  139  consider  two 
resistances  r\  and  r2  in  shunt 
circuit,  with  a  current  C  flow- 
ing from  A  to  B  as  shown  by 
the  arrows,  where  c\  and  c2  are  the  currents  through  r\  and 
r2.  The  fall  of  the  potential  from  A  to  B  is  V  volts  and 
is  the  same  by  either  path ;  then  C  =  ci  +  c2  but  by  Ohm's 

V  V  V 

law  C  =  — ;    Ci  =  — ,  and  C2  =  — ;  substituting  we  have 


FIG.  139. 

Divided  circuit,  shunt  circuit, 
or  resistances  in  parallel.  Part 
of  the  current  flows  over  each 
wire,  the  larger  part  in  the  wire 
of  least  resistance. 


R 


r2 

V  _  V      7 
R      TI      r2 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY 


169 


nected  to  the  ends  of  the  interrupter.  When  the  inter- 
rupter breaks  the  circuit  the  induced  electricity,  instead 
of  producing  a  spark,  goes  to  charge  the  condenser,  and  as 
the  circuit  is  closed  again  the  condenser  is  discharged, 
helping  to  build  up  the  current  quickly.  Hence  both 
changes  take  place  more  quickly  and  the  secondary  will 
give  a  longer  spark.  See  Fig.  145. 

An  extensively  used  modification  of  the  induction  coil 
is  the  transformer.     It  is  said  that  the  reason  the  moon- 
shiners of  the  Kentucky  moun- 
tains are  still  in  existence  is  that 
the  roads  are  so  bad  and  rail- 
roads so   few,   they  cannot  get 
their   corn    to   market,    but   by 
making  it  into  whiskey  the  bulk 
of  the  corn  is  so  much  reduced 
that  it  is  easy  to  carry  out.    After 
getting  it  to  market  in  this  form 
it  is  not  considered  good  food  for 
horses.     In  the  case  of  an  alter- 
nating current  of  electricity,  such 
as  described  on  page  133,  the  cur- 
rent may  be   reduced   to   small 
amperage    at    high    tension    for 
transportation,   and  then  easily 
transformed  to   large   amperage 
at  low  tension  for  ordinary  use. 
You  may  suppose  that  the  elec- 
tric lights  in  your  home  are  connected  with  the  power 
plant  of  the  Illuminating  Company.     They  are  not.     They 
are  completely  insulated.     To  supply  20  amperes  at  110 
volts  to  light  40  lamps,  only  one  ampere  at  2300  volts  is 
transmitted  along  the  line.     The  line  loss  in  transmitting 
the  one  ampere  is  much  less  than  it  would  be  to  transmit 


FIG.   146.  —  Closed  Core 
Transformer. 


170  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

the  20  amperes  and  the  wire  may  be  much  smaller,  and  at 
the  present  prices  of  copper  that  is  a  great  item.  How  is 
it  done?  By  means  of  the  transformer.  Imagine  an  in- 
duction coil  with  the  core  extended  from  one  end,  around 
the  outside  of  the  coil  to  the  other  end,  to  form  a  complete 
return  circuit  of  soft  iron  for  the  lines  of  magnetic  force, 
and  you  have  a  good  idea  of  the  transformer.  In  one  set 
of  windings  there  are  20  turns  of  small  wire,  for  every 
turn  of  large  wire  in  the  other  winding.  Either  may  be 
used  as  the  primary.  Usually  the  small  wire  is  connected 
to  the  2300-volt  feed  wires  and  the  large  wire  to  the  light- 
ing circuit.  If  there  were  no  loss  in  transformation  the  ratio 
of  the  voltages  would  then  be  20/1  and  that  of  the  cur- 
rents 1/20,  that  is,  the  watts  (amperes  times  volts)  would 
be  the  same  in  both  lines.  In  practise  there  is  from  30  to 
10%  loss,  although  transformers  have  been  built  which 
give  98%  efficiency.  The  transformer  will  not  work  on  a 
direct  current,  as  the  secondary  generates  an  E.M.F.  only 
during  a  change  in  the  magnetic  flux  through  the  coil,  and 
this  change  takes  place  only  while  the  current  in  the  pri- 
mary is  either  increasing  or  decreasing.  The  transformer  is 
used  on  the  alternating  current  following  the  curve  shown 
on  page  133.  In  common  practise,  the  lighting  transmis- 
sion lines  are  2300  volts  and  the  current  makes  60  cycles 
or  120  alternations  per  second.  For  long  distance  trans- 
mission high  tensions  are  used.  The  Sanitary  District  of 
Chicago  generates  power  38  miles  from  the  city  at  11,000 
volts,  steps  it  up  to  66,000  volts,  transmits  it  on  bare 
wires  to  Chicago  and  steps  it  down  to  110  volts  for  use. 
Some  lines  transmit  power  at  100,000  volts.  In  one  of 
our  large  cities  a  2300  volt  lighting  wire  fell  across  a  tele- 
phone wire  and  before  the  "  trouble  shooter  "  could  locate 
and  correct  it  several  people  were  killed  by  shocks  from 
telephones.  It  is  important  that  wherever  such  lines  cross 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY  171 

they  should  be  protected  by  automatic  devices  which  will 
cut  them  out  of  the  circuit  if  anything  happens  to  the 
line.  A  person  with  dry  feet  standing  on  a  dry  floor  may 
handle  one  side  of  a  2300  volt  circuit  with  bare  hands 
without  danger,  but  he  must  not  ground  the  circuit  or 
connect  the  two  lines  through  his  body. 

We  are  now  ready  to  take  a  more  complete  survey  of 
the  lighting  system  of  a  modern  city.  For  street  lighting, 
the  system  still  in  common  use  is  the  open  arc  with  the 
lamps  in  series.  Such  lamps  require  about  45  volts  for 
each  lamp  and  an  average  of  5  volts  for  line  drop,  making 
50  volts  for  each  lamp.  100  lamps  are  connected  in  series 
and  operated  by  5,000  volts  D.C.  constant  current  dynamo. 
The  current  for  most  cities  is  maintained  at  6.6  amperes, 
although  some  use  9.6  amperes.  Such  lights  rate  at  1,200 
and  2,000  candle-power  respectively.  They  should  never 
have  been  rated  so  high,  as  they  actually  give  only  from  375 
to  450  candle-power.  The  demonstration  with  the  lead 
pencil  arc  has  shown  that,  when  turned  on,  the  carbons 
must  be  in  contact  and  then  drawn  apart  to  "draw  out 
the  arc."  As  the  carbons  are  burned  away  under  the 
heat  of  the  arc,  one  or  both  must  be  fed  forward.  Both 
these  movements  are  accomplished  by  means  of  the  electro 
magnet.  The  coils  of  large  wire,  S,  Fig.  147,  is  in  series 
with  the  arc.  The  sliding  brush,  B,  forms  contact  with 
the  brass  rod  carrying  the  upper  carbon.  When  the  key, 
K,  is  opened  the  current  flows  through  the  coil,  S,  and 
lifts  the  armature,  pulling  the  upper  carbon  with  it  by 
means  of  the  loose  clutch,  A.  The  coil,  C,  is  of  small 
wire  with  a  high  resistance  and  takes  very  little  current 
while  the  arc  is  short,  but  as  the  arc  increases  in  length  by 
the  burning  of  the  carbons  the  resistance  becomes  greater. 
The  dynamo  is  all  this  time  forcing  a  constant  current 
through  the  lamp  so  that  the  strength  of  the  magnet,  S, 


172 


APPLIED   PHYSICS 


FIG.  147. 


stays  the  same,  but  the  increasing  resistance  of  the  arc 
drives  more  current  through  the  coil,  C,  until  it  overcomes 
the  pull  of  the  upper  magnet  and  pulls  the  clutch  down. 

When  the  clutch,  A, 
strikes  block,  D,  and  takes 
the  horizontal  position, 
the  rod  slips  through  it 
and  the  upper  carbon  is 
said  to  "feed."  The  coil, 
C,  may  be  wound  on  the 
outside  of  coil,  S,  but  with 
current  in  the  opposite 
direction  to  it,  and  the 
result  is  the  same. 

In    the    open    arc .  de- 
scribed above,  the  carbons 

at  the  high  temperature  of  the  electric  arc  (about  3,500°  C.) 
are  oxidized  rapidly  and  must  be  replaced  after  about  8  hours. 
In  the  inclosed  arc,  used  in  most  of  the  newer  lighting 
systems,  the  arc  is  inclosed  in  an  inner  small  glass  globe 
which  fits  rather  closely  about  the  carbons  to  prevent 
much  circulation  of  air.  This  globe  soon  becomes  filled 
with  CO2  instead  of  O  and  the  carbons  are  not  consumed 
so  rapidly.  The  carbons  in  such  a  lamp  will  last  from  150 
to  200  hours,  hence  much  of  the  expense  of  "  trimming  " 
is  saved. 

In  both  the  arcs  described  most  of  the  light  comes  from 
the  pit  formed  in  the  positive  carbon,  as  very  little  light 
comes  from  the  arc  itself.  A  type  of  lamp  now  coming 
into  use  is  the  flaming  arc.  The  carbons  are  fed  forward 
at  an  angle.  The  carbons  have  been  soaked  in  some  salt, 
usually  calcium  floride,  or  have  a  core  composed  of  the 
same  salt.  The  heat  of  the  arc  vaporizes  the  salt  and 
the  electricity  is  conducted  on  this  incandescent  gas.  The 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY  173 

light  is  the  color  caused  by  the  salt  used  and  comes  mostly 
from  the  arc  itself.  They  are  often  used  two  in  series 
on  the  110  volt  A.C.  circuit. 

For  incandescent  lighting,  where  the  electricity  is  to  be 
used  in  the  building,  it  is  quite  the  common  practice  to 
use  220  volt  D.C.  generator.  The  lamps  are  connected 
in  parallel,  hence  the  voltage  must  remain  constant  while 
each  .lamp  takes  its  own  current,  and  the  total  current 
used  is  the  sum  of  the  currents  required  for  each  lamp 
turned  on.  Where  the  power  must  be  transmitted  for 
long  distances,  such  as  required  in  lighting  a  large  city 
from  one  central  plant,  this  would  mean  the  transmission 
of  large  currents.  It  is  found  that  for  a  given  wire  the 
loss  due  to  heat  in  the  line  increases  as  the  square  of  the 
current,  that  is,  double  the  current,  and  the  line  loss  is 
four  times  as  large.  The  loss  due  to  carrying  a  large 
current  is  avoided  by  using  an  A.C.  generator  or  alternator 
and  generating  current  at  2300  volts.  This  is  transmitted 
over  well-insulated  bare  wires  to  the  city  block  where  it 
is  to  be  used  and  then  stepped  down  by  a  transformer, 
already  described,  to  110  volts  and  distributed  to  the  house 
for  use. 

The  incandescent  lamp  used  'until  recently  has  a  small 
filament  of  carbon  inclosed  in  a  vacuum  within  a  bulb. 
When  the  electric  current,  passes  through,  this  filament  is 
heated  to  incandescence.  The  resistance  of  the  carbon 
decreases  as  the  temperature  increases.  The  carbon  lamp 
requires  about  3J  watts  per  candle-power.  About  98% 
of  the  power  used  is  lost  in  heat.  Recently  filaments  made 
of  the  element  tungsten  have  come  into  common  use. 
The  resistance  of  this  filament  increases  as  the  tempera- 
ture rises.  It  requires  about  1J  watts  per  candle-power. 
The  long  filament  is  fragile  and  must  be  handled  with  great 
care.  It  is  best  to  burn  the  lamp  in  a  vertical  position, 


174  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

and  even  then  it  is  found  that  the  life  of  the  lamp  is  short 
if  there  is  much  vibration  of  the  fixture.  Where  the  voltage 
is  lower  the  filament  does  not  need  to  have  so  high  a  resist- 
ance and  may  be  made  shorter  and  thicker.  For  this 
reason  engineers  are  generally  of  the  opinion  that  where 
new  buildings  are  being  fitted  for  electric  light  it  is  better 
to  fit  them  for  40  volt  lamps  and  transform  the  current 
40  volts  instead  of  110.  Where  this  has  been  tried  the 
lamps  are  showing  high  efficiency  and  long  life.  The 
110  volt  circuit  is  left  because  of  the  old  carbon  lamp. 
Space  forbids  a  detailed  description  of  the  Nernst  lamp  and 
the  Cooper  Hewitt  mercury  vapor  arc. 

The  complete  circuit  for  the  ordinary  lighting  circuit  is 
shown  in  Fig.  148.  As  shown,  the  house  circuit  is  not 
electrically  connected  to  the  power-house  from  which  the 
consumer  buys  power,  but  is  completely  insulated  from  it. 
The  only  connection  is  the  magnetic  interlinking  in  the 
transformer.  For  such  a  circuit  the  alternating  current 

shown  by  the  curve  on 
Page  133,  known  as  single 
phase,  is  used. 
FIG.  148.  —  Transformer  Circuit.  In  considering  a  wave- 

The  line  circuit  is  insulated  from  the  motion  and  when  speak- 
house  circuit.  Both  are  wound  on  the  .  ,  ,  A  r1 

same  iron  core,  and  change  in  current  mS  about  trie  A.U. 
in  the  primary  generates  the  E.M.F.  current  already  shown, 
of  the  secondary.  ,,  ,  ,  . 

we    called    a    complete 

wave  a  cycle.  In  the  two-pole  machine  studied  it  required 
a  complete  revolution  of  360°.  On  a  many-pole  machine 
the  rotation  from  a  north  pole  past  a  south  pole  and  to  the 
position  in  front  of  the  next  north  pole  produces  the  same 
electrical  effect  as  a  complete  revolution  of  the  two-pole 
machine.  It  is,  therefore,  an  electric  cycle,  and  is  con- 
sidered electrically  360°.  Phase  refers  to  the  position  in 
this  cycle.  If  it  has  made  one  fourth  of  the  cycle  the  phase 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY 


175 


FIG.  149. 


is  90  degrees.     In  the  alternator   it  is   common  to  have 
the  armature  stationary  and  revolve  the  fields,  as  in  Fig. 
149.     Suppose  the  coil 
were  spread  out  as  coil  V 

a  —  b  in  that  figure. 
Some  of  the  turns  of 
wire  will  be  generat- 
ing E.M.F.  opposed  to 
the  rest  of  the  coil  and 
the  back  pressure  will 
prevent  the  coil  from 
generating  as  much 
pressure  as  it  should. 
It  was  early  found  that 
if  the  coil  were  crowd- 
ed together,  as  at  d, 
all  the  turns  of  wire 

would  be  in  the  same  phase,  that  is,  they  would  reach  the 
highest  point  of  the  curve  at  the  same  time  and  produce  the 
greatest  result.  But  if  the  turns  were  crowded  together  this 

way  they  would  leave  a  large 

fi  \/2  \/s  \/*\  /  \  s  part  of  the  ring  not  sur- 
rounded by  wire;  and  to  put 
on  more  coils  and  connect 
them  together  would  only  go 
back  to  the  wide-spread  coil 
a  —  6.  If  separate  coils  be 
put  on  equally  spaced  as 

1,  2,  3,  Fig.  149,  the  first  is  almost  through  the  cycle  when 
the  third  is  just  starting  it,  that  is,  they  are  in  different 
phase  and  are  really  120°  apart  on  the  electrical  revolution. 
In  Fig.  150  the  E.M.F.  generated  by  each  of  the  three  coils 
is  shown  by  lines  1,  2,  and  3.  Add  the  three  pressures  at 
any  point  of  the  curve  and  you  will  find  the  result  zero. 


FIG.  150. 


176 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


The  electrician  who  built  the  first   alternator  tried  to 
connect  the  coils  in  series  and  found  they  would  not  light 


2300  Volts 


110  V. 


2300  Volts 


110  V. 


2300  Volts 


110  V. 


3  Phase    6  Wires 


FIG.  151. 

lamps  while  each  coil  separately  would  run  electric 
lights.  Each  coil  may  be  used  separately  as  in  Fig.  151, 
and  each  makes  a  satisfactory 
lighting  circuit.  There  are  many 
alternators  in  operation,  fur- 
nishing three  separate  circuits 
at  2300  volts  each.  Such  a  3 
machine  generates  as  much 
electricity  as  three  separate 
machines  would  do.  It  takes 
three  times  as  much  power  to 
run  it  as  one  set  of  c  coils  FIG.  152. 

would  require,  but  it  takes  no 

more  floor  space  in  the  power  plant  than  one  machine 
with  one  set  of  coils  would  require. 

If  the  three  are  connected  together  the  result  is  like  con- 
necting three  equal  forces  pulling  at  angles  of  120°,  as  in 
Fig.  152.  The  resultant  of  any  two  is  equal  to  and  opposite 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY 


177 


tine 


Phase  1 

Common  Connection 
Phase  2 

Line 

Line 


Line 


FIG.  153. 


to  the  third  and  the  result  of  all  three  is  exactly  zero.  Elec- 
tricians have  lately  found  out  how  to  take  advantage  of  this 
to  save  wire.  The  three  coils 
of  the  alternator  are  connected 
together  at  one  end  of  each 
and  a  wire  from  the  other  end 
of  each  is  run  out  across  the 
city  (Fig.  153),  and  each  run 
through  its  lighting  circuit, 
and  then  after  running  through 
its  useful  circuit  are  all  con- 
nected together.  Each  fur- 
nishes its  own  circuit  with  its 
full  supply  of  current  but, 
when  the  three  run  together, 
the  result  is  zero,  and  no 
return  wire  is  needed.  The  wire  may  stop  at  the  union 

or  be  grounded  as  de- 
sired. It  will  be  seen 
that  the  three  wires 
in  this  circuit  operate 
as  many  lights  as  the 
six  wires  above.  This 
is  the  common  three- 
wire,  three-phase  sys- 
tem of  the  present 
time. 

The    Sanitary    Dis- 
trict    of    Chicago 
develops  about  60,000 
horse-power  at  66,000 
FlG-  154<  volts    and   transmits 

Diagram  showing  coils  and  their  cormec-    it  34  miles  to  Chicago 
tion  m  the    armature  of    a  three-phase  ._  .  . 

alternator. 

13 


over  three  aluminium 


178 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


conductors.     The  neutral  wire  at  each  end  is  grounded, 
but  under  all  ordinary  conditions  carries  no  current. 

When  studying  the  direct  current  generator  and  appli- 
cation of  the  electro  magnet  a  brief  study  of  the  direct 
current  motor  was  made.  Refer  to  it  and  read  it  as  a 

part  of  this  lesson.  A 
direct  current  genera- 
tor may  be  used  for  a 
motor.  A  small  direct 
current  series  motor 
may  be  used  on  a  sin- 
gle phase  A.C.  circuit, 
as  the  current  reverses 
the  field  at  the  same 
time  that  it  reverses  in 
the  armature,  but  for 
large  motors  this  would 
not  work.  In  operat- 
ing the  D.C.  motor, 
the  shunt  type  of  con- 
nection is  generally 
FIG.  155. 


From  a  photograph  of  the  station- 
ary armature  of  the  type  of  three-phase 
alternator  used  to  generate  most  of  the 
electricity  used  at  the  present  tune. 
Fig.  156  shows  the  revolving  field  for  this 
generator.  The  field  is  excited  by  a  di- 
rect current  from  a  small  D.C.  dynamo 
called  the  exciter.  In  Fig.  157  the 
dynamo  is  shown  assembled. 


used,  except  in  the 
street  car,  where  the 
motor  must  start  under 
heavy  load.  In  that 
case  series  motor  is 
used.  The  winding  of 
the  armature  and  of  the 


field  is  practically  the 

same  as  for  a  generator,  and  if  the  shunt  motor  were 
belted  to  an  engine  and  run  up  to  speed  it  would  act  as  a 
generator.  When  running  as  a  motor,  however,  the  E.M.F. 
is  supplied  by  an  outside  source  and  drives  the  current 
through  the  machine  and  the  magnetic  drag  of  the  lines 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY 


179 


of  force  pulls  the  armature  around.  The  resistance  of  an 
armature  intended  to  operate  on  the  220-volt  circuit  is 
usually  only  a  fraction  of  an 
ohm.  Applying  Ohm's  law 
would  show  an  enormous  cur- 
rent, which  would  either  blow 
all  fuses  on  the  circuit  or 
burn  out  the  insulation  of 
the  armature.  If  the  full 
drop  of  potential  is  applied 
while  the  motor  is  standing 
still  this  would  be  the  case, 
but  a  starting  box  is  con- 
nected in  series  with  the 

armature   and   as   the  motor    FIG.  156.  -  The  Revolving  Field. 

is    started   the   lever   of   the 

starting  box  is  moved  over  slowly.      On  the  first  notch 

the  resistance  is  all  in  series  with  the  armature,  and 

holds  down  the  cur- 
rent. As  the  motor 
gets  up  speed  the  lever 
is  moved  over  on  the 
successive  contacts 
until  when  the  motor 
has  reached  full  speed 
the  resistance  is  all  cut 
out  and  the  E.M.F. 
is  all  applied  to  the 
motor  armature,  Fig. 
158.  The  resistance 
is  no  longer  needed  be- 


FIG. 157.  —  The  Dynamo. 


cause    the    motor    run- 
ning at  speed  is  acting 
as  a  dynamo  and  generating  an  E.M.F.  in  the  direction 


180 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


opposite  to  that  applied,  and  this  back  pressure,  which 
is  almost  equal  to  that  applied,  keeps  the  current  from 
becoming  large.  In  fact,  if  a  motor  were  a  perpetual- 
motion  machine,  that  is,  an  ideal  machine  running  with- 
out friction  and  doing  no  work,  the  counter  E.M.F. 
would  be  equal  to  that  applied,  and  the  current  zero 
a  condition  not  reached  in  practice. 

On  every  street  car  there  is  a  controller  for  the  motor- 
man  which  contains  a  set 
of  contacts  to  control  the 
current  through  the  rheo- 
stat and  motors  beneath 
the  car.  There  are  on 
each  car,  connected  to 
the  drivers  by  a  spur 
gear,  either  two  or  four 
series  motors.  When  the 
controller  is  on  the  first 
notch  the  motors  are  all 
in  series  with  the  rheo- 
stat. If  run  here  long 
much  power  is  lost  in 
heat  in  the  rheostat.  The 
next  notches  cut  out  re- 
FIG.  158.  sistance  until  the  fourth 

Wiring  diagram  for  a  D.C.  Shunt  M6tor.  and    fifth    notch.      Here 

the  resistance  is  all  out 

and  the  motors  are  in  series  and  at  half  speed,  but  no 
power  is  lost  in  heat  in  the  resistance.  The  next  notch 
throws  the  motors  in  parallel  and  all  the  resistance  of  the 
rheostat  is  thrown  in  again.  The  next  successive  notches 
cut  out  the  resistance  until  on  the  eighth  notch  all  the 
resistance  is  out  and  the  full  550  volts  is  applied  to  the 
motors  in  parallel,  and  the  motor  is  furnishing  its  full 


MAGNETISM  AND  ELECTRICITY 


181 


power.  The  ninth  or  last  notch  shunts  the  field.  This 
weakens  the  strength  of  the  field  magnets.  On  a  level 
track  the  car  will  then  run  at  full  speed,  as  the  motor 
armature  must  turn  faster  to  cut  as  many  lines  of  force 
as  before.  Weakening  the  field  makes  the  motor  run 
faster  provided  it  is  not  too  heavily  loaded.  Except  in 
starting,  the  car  should  be  run  on  the  running  notches  to 
avoid  loss  in  heat  in  the  rheostat.  If  the  controller  is 
thrown  over  too  fast  the  circuit  breaker  is  automatically 

Main 


Main 


FIG.  159. 
Wiring  diagram  for  a  Series  D.C.  Motor. 

released  and  protects  the  motors  from  burning  out.  Some 
motormen  are  experts  at  starting  a  car  smoothly  and  run- 
ning in  the  running  notches  most  of  the  time.  Other 
motormen  are  careless  and  cost  the  operating  company  far 
too  much  for  power  wasted  in  the  rheostat.  Watch  the 
next  motorman  you  ride  with  and  see  if  he  is  using  the 
current  intelligently  or  if  he  is  wasting  power  and  destroy- 
ing equipment. 

The    recording   watt-meter    (Fig.  160)    is    practically    a 
little  motor.      To  keep  it  from  running  too  fast  a  brake 


182 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


which  acts  in  proportion  to  the  speed  must  be  used. 
A  mechanical  brake  would  act  too  strongly  when  the 
machine  was  standing  still  or  running  slowly  and  not 
strongly  enough  when  the  meter  is  running  rapidly. 
In  the  bottom  of  the  watt-meter  shown,  an  aluminium 
disk,  run  by  the  motor,  revolves  between  the  poles  of 


Armature. 

FIG.  160.  —  The  Recording  Watt-meter. 

This  is  practically  a  small  motor  in  which  the 
number  of  revolutions  depends  upon  the  number  of 
kilowatt-hours  of  electrical  energy  used.  A  worm 
gear  moves  the  pointers  which  record  the  power 
used. 


a  flat  horseshoe  magnet.  Aluminium  is  non-magnetic, 
but  when  the  plate  revolves  it  cuts  the  lines  of  force 
and  eddy  currents  are  set  up.  These  eddy  currents  are 
in  proportion  to  the  rate  of  cutting  lines  of  force  and 
therefore  proportional  to  speed.  The  magnet  reacts  on 
these  and  drags  them  back,  acting  as  a  brake.  Read 


MAGNETISM  AND  ELECTRICITY 


183 


the  meter  at  home,  then  time  it  for  an  hour  on  a  given 
number  of  lamps,  and  see  if  it  is  running  properly. 

We  have  considered  the  direct  current  motor,  its  use 
and  control,  but  to  be  at  all  up  to  date  we  must  consider 
at  least  two  types  of  A.C.  motors.  A  few  years  ago  one 
of  the  leading  scientific  papers  of  our  country  published  a 
long  article  stating  that  the  A.C.  motor  would  probably 
never  be  used  except  for  a  few  special  applications  because 
it  would  run  at  only 
one  speed  and  because 
it  was  very  unreliable  at 
that.  Now  they  are  in 
common  use  for  all  pur- 
poses. The  use  of  the 
two-  and  three-phase 
current  and  the  single 
phase  "  split,"  so  that  it 
becomes  a  two-phase 
current,  has  brought 
about  this  result.  Fig. 
161  represents  a  ring  of 
soft  iron  with  a  coil  of  wire  connected  to  a  single  phase 
A.C.  generator  furnishing  60  cycles. 

A  permanent  magnet  is  mounted  on  a  shaft  so  that  it 
may  revolve  within  the  ring.  As  the  current  through  the 
coil  rises  in  one  direction  a  north  pole  is  built  up  at 
the  top  of  the  ring;  then  it  dies  out  and  is  built  up  at  the 
bottom  of  the  ring  as  the  current  rises  in  the  opposite 
direction.  This  alternation  takes  place  120  times  per 
second.  At  one  time  it  is  repelling  and  at  the  other  time 
attracting  the  magnet.  This  action  takes  place  so  rapidly 
that  the  tendency  for  the  magnet  to  begin  to  rotate  is 
gone  and  the  tendency  to  push  it  the  other  way  appears 
before  the  magnet  has  had  time  to  start.  The  result  is  that 


FIG.  161. 


184 


APPLIED   PHYSICS 


the  magnet  remains  stationary.  If,  however,  it  is  started 
and  run  up  to  speed,  that  is,  60  revolutions  per  second 
in  either  direction,  the  alternating  field  will  give  it  a  pull 
or  push  in  the  same  direction  twice  each  revolution  and 
it  will  run  as  a  constant  speed  motor.  A  permanent  magnet 
may  be  replaced  by  an  electro  magnet  and  the  effect  will 
be  the  same.  Such  a  motor  is  called  a  synchronous  motor, 
as  it  keeps  step  with  the  generator.  It  will  not  start  itself 
and  if  overloaded  so  that  it  falls  behind  the  generator  it 


FIG.  162. 

will  stop.  Such  motors  are  of  use  where  a  number  of 
machines  must  run  at  exactly  the  same  speed  and  that 
speed  be  controlled  from  one  point,  the  generator. 

If  we  have  a  two-phase  current  with  one  90°  behind  the 
other,  as  in  Fig.  162,  and  connect  to  two  sets  of  coils  wound 
on  a  ring  as  in  Fig.  162,  we  will  have  current,  r,  at  its  largest 
value  when  s  is  zero,  and  we  will  have  Ni  as  shown  in  the 
ring  at  point  A.  One-eighth  of  a  cycle  later,  r  will  have 
fallen  to  half  its  value  and  s  will  have  risen  to  half  its  value ; 
the  resultant  will  be  N>2  pole  half  way  between  the  two  at 
0.  It  will  have  reached  that  point  by  moving  along  the 
ring  from  A  to  0  as  r  has  decreased  gradually  and  s  has 
increased  gradually.  One-eighth  of  a  cycle  later  r  will 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY 


185 


be  zero  and  s  will  be  at  its  highest  point,  resulting  in  a 
north  pole  at  N*  at  C.  As  the  cycle  continues  the  north 
pole  will  slide  along  the  ring,  making  the  complete  circuit. 
As  it  passes  the  pole  of  the  magnet  it  will  give  it  a  jerk 
to  bring  it  along  with  it,  and  as  these  impulses  are  all  in 
the  same  direction  the  magnet  will  start  and  we  will  have 
a  self -starting  two-phase  A.C.  motor.  The  magnet  may 
be  replaced  by  an  electro  magnet,  electrically  excited, 
and  the  result  will  be  the  same.  Instead  of  an  elec- 
tro magnet,  that  is,  an  armature  excited  from  with- 
out, place  an  iron  core  similar  to  the  drum  armature 
with  large  copper  bars  placed  in  the  slots  around  the  cir- 
cumference, as  in  Fig.  163,  with  the  bars  connected  so  that 
they  resemble  a  revolving  wheel  in  the  squirrel  cage.  If 
this  replaces  the  mag- 
net in  Fig.  162  it  will 
not  be  a  magnet  as 
long  as  zero  current 
flows  through  the 
coils  of  the  ring.  As 
soon  as  the  current  is 
turned  on  in  the  coils 
on  the  ring  the  field 
begins  to  run  around 
the  ring.  We  have  a 
field  revolving  rapidly 
around  a  closed  cir-  FlG-  163< 

cuit  loop  of  wire,  and,    ,  Squirrel  Cage  Rotor  of  the  three-phase  In- 

auction  Motor, 
although  that  loop  of 

wire  has  no  electric  connection  with  any  outside  circuit, 
the  revolving  field  generates  a  large  current  in  it  and  this 
makes  a  magnet  of  the  iron  core,  and  the  field  acting  on  this 
magnet  drags  it  around  and  we  have  a  self-starting  variable 
speed  A.C.  motor  known  as  the  induction  motor.  As  elec- 


186 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


tricians  do  not  know  which  to  call  the  armature  nor  which 
to  call  the  field,  they  avoid  the  difficulty  by  calling  the 
stationary  part  the  stator  and  the  rotating  part  the  rotor. 
The  three-phase  A.C.  lends  itself  to  this  type  of  motor  very 
well  indeed,  as  it  requires  only  three  wires  for  transmission 
from  alternator  to  motor  and  by  placing  the  coils  uniformly 
produces  a  revolving  field.  Since  a  revolution  means  an 
electric  cycle,  that  is,  from  one  pole  past  the  opposite  to 
the  like  pole  again,  these  may  be  placed  along  the  ring  to 
give  any  speed  desired.  Such  a  motor  has  no  sliding  con- 
tacts, so  all  commutator  and  ring  troubles  are  eliminated. 
A  resistance  is  usually  placed  in  the  rotor  to  prevent  too 


1  IJV                                                                                    Tino                                                             Receiver       Jffl 

w 

J"           Id 

WVVVWVW                                                     WAMAMA/ 

r    TJ 

Transmitter 


FIG.  164.  —  Telephone  circuit. 


The  transmitter  changes  sound  waves  to  a  fluctuating  current  of 
electricity.  These  are  changed  at  the  receiver  to  sound,  thus  repro- 
ducing words  spoken  at  the  transmitter. 

large  a  current  while  the  motor  is  getting  up  speed,  and  then 
is  automatically  cut  out  by  centrifugal  force  as  soon  as 
the  motor  is  up  to  speed.  Many  electric  railways  are  now 
adopting  the  three-phase  induction  motor  for  traction 
purposes. 

The  telephone  is  an  interesting  application  of  the  electric 
current  to  the  transmission  of  messages.  In  discussing 
Ohm's  law  we  found  that  if  the  applied  E.M.F.  remains 
constant  while  the  resistance  of  the  circuit  is  changed,  the 
current  changes  accordingly. 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY  187 

If  two  pieces  of  carbon  are  placed  in  contact  and  an 
electric  current  is  sent  through  them,  the  resistance  changes 
with  every  change  of  pressure.  The  modern  telephone 
makes  use  of  this  fact.  Fig.  164  shows  a  diagram  of  the 
essential  parts.  The  transmitter  contains  a  space  (A) 
filled  with  small  pieces  of  hard  carbon  between  two  plates 
B  and  C.  One  of  these  plates,  B,  is  at  the  base  of  the 
mouthpiece  and  vibrates  with  every  sound  wave  entering 
the  mouthpiece.  This  causes  the  pressure  between  the 
carbon  particles  to  vary  with  every  vibration  and  this 
causes  the  current  in  the  primary  circuit  to  fluctuate  with 
the  same  pulsations  that  the  sound  waves  make.  The  pri- 
mary runs  through  an  induction  coil,  D,  and  as  the  induc- 
tion takes  place  only  with  changes  of  current  the  secondary, 
E,  carries  an  exceedingly  small  current  fluctuating  with 
every  sound  vibration;  but  it  is  not  sound,  it  is  only 
fluctuating  electric  current,  and  would  not  affect  the  ear 
except  to  shock  it;  so  the  receiver  is  used.  It  is  a  per- 
manent magnet  with  a  steel  disc,  G,  placed  in  front  of 
one  end  of  it.  F  is  a  coil  of  fine  wire  wound  around  the 
magnet  and  connected  to  the  line  carrying  the  fluctuating 
current  from  the  transmitter.  This  varying  current  causes 
the  same  changes  in  magnetism,  and  the  steel  plate,  G, 
reproduces  the  same  vibrations  in  the  air  which  were 
received  at  the  transmitter,  B.  The  sound  is  not  carried 
along  the  wire  but  is  changed  to  a  fluctuating  current  of 
electricity,  and  this  is  conducted  along  the  wire  and  at 
the  receiver  is  changed  back  to  sound. 

Historically  static  electricity  was  known  for  hundreds 
of  years  before  any  practical  use  was  made  of  electricity 
and  for  that  reason  is  usually  studied  first.  It  has  little 
practical  application  and  will  be  considered  here  very 
briefly,  not  because  of  its  value,  but  because  most  of  the 
boys  are  interested  in  it.  The  principal  application  is  in 


188  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

the  condenser  used  in  wireless  telegraphy.  At  any  time 
some  inventor  may  bring  out  a  practical  application  which 
will  increase  the  importance,  to  the  world,  of  static  elec- 
tricity; there  are  rumors  that  Edison  has  one  now. 

The  Greeks  knew  that  if  amber  (Greek  electron)  is 
rubbed  with  silk  some  change  takes  place  around  it  so 
that  it  will  attract  small  pieces  of  paper.  This  is  the  origin 
of  the  name  electricity.  Later  it  was  found  that  glass 
rubbed  with  silk  and  wax  rubbed  with  fur  differed  from 
each  other,  and  the  former  came  to  be  called  positive  and 
the  latter  negative  electricity.  Almost  any  two  sub- 
stances rubbed  together  will  generate  electricity  but  many 
substances  conduct  the  strain  away  so  it  is  not  detected. 
When  one  kind  of  strain  is  developed  an  equal  amount  of 
the  opposite  sign  is  also  generated,  that  is,  when  glass  is 
rubbed  with  silk  the  positive  strain  is  found  on  the  glass 
and  an  equal  amount  of  negative  electricity  is  found  on  the 
silk.  There  is  an  impression  that  this  electricity  is  differ- 
ent from  the  electricity  we  have  been  studying  generated 
by  dynamos  or  batteries.  This  is  not  correct;  it  is  the 
same  kind  of  strain.  When  electricity  is  flowing  along  a 
conductor  it  is  called  current  electricity  and  when  a  body 
is  charged  with  electricity  which  is  said  to  be  standing 
still  it  is  called  static  electricity.  When  a  condenser  is 
charged  by  a  current  it  becomes  static. 

A  little  time  spent  experimenting  with  a  glass  rod,  silk, 
wool,  and  sealing  wax  will  convince  the  student  that  like 
electricities  repel  and  -unlike  charges  attract  each  other. 
If  a  glass  jar  is  lined  with  tinfoil,  and  covered  outside  with 
tinfoil,  but  the  two  coats  left  insulated  by  the  glass  and  a 
charge  of  electricity  is  communicated  to  one  of  the  coats, 
it  will  attract  and  hold  in  the  other  coat  an  equal  amount 
of  the  opposite  kind  and  repel  an  equal  amount  of  the  like 
kind,  which  will  escape  if  given  a  chance.  To  charge  a 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY  189 

Ley  den  jar,  connect  the  outer  coat  to  the  earth  and  then 
conduct  either  +  or  —  electricity  to  the  inner  coat;  the 
repelled  charge  will  flow  to  the  earth  and  the  bound  charge 
will  remain.  When  charged,  a  large  spark  may  be  obtained 
by  connecting  the  two  coats,  so  that  the  two  phases  of  the 
strain  which  are  trying  to  get  together  may  unite.  A 
Ley  den  jar  may  give  a  serious  shock.  If  the  glass  is  re- 
placed by  paraffined  paper  and  the  tinfoil  is  built  up  in 
several  layers,  first  a  strip  of  tinfoil  and  then  a  strip  of 
the  oiled  paper  etc.,  with  every  other  strip  of  tinfoil  con- 
nected together  at  one  end  and  to  one  pole,  while  the  others 
are  connected  together  to  the  other  pole,  we  have  a  con- 
denser. Some  form  of  condenser  is  much  used  in  wire- 
less telegraphy,  as  we  shall  see  later. 

A  few  experiments  which  every  student  should  work  at 
home  and  which  will  lead  to  a  thoughtful  understanding 
of  static  electricity  are  the  following: 

Rub  a  piece  of  glass  with  silk,  bring  it  near  some  small 
piece  of  paper,  also  bring  it  near  a  very  small  jet  of  water. 
Can  you  explain  what  you  see?  Rub  a  piece  of  sealing 
wax  with  wool  or  fur.  Repeat  the  experiment  you  did 
with  the  glass.  Suspend  two  small  pieces  of  pith  by 
silk  thread  and  let  them  touch  the  electric  wax.  Explain 
what  you  see.  When  they  are  electrified  from  the  wax, 
bring  the  glass  near  them. 

Scuff  your  feet  along  on  any  wool  rug  and  then  touch  the 
gas  pipe  or  any  other  grounded  conductor.  It  takes  several 
thousand  volts  to  produce  a  spark  one-eighth  of  an  inch 
long  —  why  did  the  spark  produce  no  serious  results?  Let 
some  one  else  turn  on  the  gas  and  you  can  light  it  with  the 
spark  from  your  finger. 

For  testing  static  charges  of  electricity  a  gold  leaf  elec- 
troscope is  commonly  used.  As  shown  in  Fig.  165,  a  flask 
is  fitted  with  a  rod  through  the  stopper  and  the  upper  end 


190  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

terminates  in  a  brass  ball  while  the  lower  end  supports 
two  pieces  of  gold-leaf.  When  this  is  charged  the  leaves 
fly  apart  as  shown  in  the  figure  because  like  charges  repel. 
To  charge  an  electroscope  by  conduction,  take  a  small 
piece  of  metal  carried  on  a  hard  rubber  handle  and  after 
rubbing  it  on  a  charged  body  touch  it  to 
the  ball  of  the  electroscope.  This  will 
charge  the  electroscope  by  conduction.  To 
charge  by  induction  bring  any  charged 
body  near  the  ball  and  the  like  sign  will 
be  repelled  to  the  leaves  while  the  unlike 
sign  will  be  attracted  to  the  ball.  Now 
touch  the  ball  with  the  finger  and  the  re- 
pelled charge  will  escape  to  the  earth. 
Remove  the  finger  and  then  remove  the 
charged  body  and  the  leaves  will  stand 
FIG.  165.  —  Elec-  apart,  the  electroscope  being  charged  with 
troscope.  ^e  sjgn  opposite  to  that  of  the  inducing 


^i 

the    gold   leaves  . 

diverge.  Study  the  influence  machine  and  report 

on  its  operation.  We  found  that  when  a 
direct  current  was  used  in  the  primary  of  an  induction 
coil  the  secondary  gave  a  high  potential  spark  when  the 
primary  current  was  interrupted.  This  discharge  practi- 
cally all  occurs  at  the  interruption  of  the  primary. 

A  condenser  connected  to  the  terminals  increases  the 
intensity  or  "fatness"  of  the  spark.  The  discharge  of  a 
condenser  behaves  like  a  spring  carrying  a  heavy  weight. 
When  stretched  and  released  it  bobs  up  and  down,  that 
is,  it  vibrates,  gradually  coming  to  rest.  The  spark  dis- 
charge is  similar.  It  oscillates,  as  shown  in  Figs.  166 
and  167. 

If  the  ends  of  the  secondary  be  connected  to  the  ends  of 
a  Geissler  tube,  the  discharge  is  found  to  be  entirely  differ- 


MAGNETISM  AND  ELECTRICITY 


191 


FIG.  166. 

The  spark  from  a  condenser 
oscillates  as  shown  above. 


ent.     The   Geissler  tube  is   a  glass   tube  with   platinum 

terminals  sealed  into  the  ends  and  the  air  exhausted  to 

about  1/380  of   an  atmosphere.     The  discharge   through 

the  tube  becomes  almost  continuous  and  the  gas  left  in 

the  tube  glows  with  a  brilliant 

color  which  depends  upon  the 

kind  of  gas  remaining  in  the 

tube.     The     light    resembles 

the  Aurora    display.     It    has 

been  used  to  a  limited  extent 

in    lighting    buildings.      The 

Moore  light  on  this  principle 

is  now  successfully  used. 

When  the  gas  is  exhausted 
to  about  one-millionth  of  an 

atmosphere  the  discharge  undergoes  another  change  dis- 
covered by  Sir  William  Crooks.  A  stream  of  electrified 
particles  called  corpuscles  is  projected  from  the  cathode 
in  straight  lines  until  they  meet  the  opposite  side  of  the 

tube  and  there  cause  it  to 
glow  with  a  beautiful  flores- 
cence. These  particles 
cannot  pass  through  the 
glass  and  may  be  deflected 
from  their  course  by  a  mag- 
net. Rontgen  found  that 
when  these  particles  of  the 
cathode  rays  strike  on  glass, 
x-ray  Field  or  better  on  a  platinum 

FIG.  167.  screen  placed  in  their  path, 

they  give  rise  to  a  differ- 
ent kind  of  ray  or  vibration,  which  he  called  the  X-ray. 
These  rays  will  pass  through  glass,  paper,  cardboard, 
wood,  etc.,  but  not  through  metal  or  bone.  They  will 


192 


APPLIED  PHYSICS 


affect  the  photographer's  plate  as  light  does,  hence  when 
a  photographer's  plate  is  placed  in  a  plate-holder  or  box 
and  the  hand  laid  on  the  box  and  exposed  to  the  X-ray, 
the  ray  will  pass  through  the  flesh  and  the  box  but  not 
through  the  bones  and  a  shadow  picture  of  the  bones  and 
any  metal  imbedded  in  the  hand  will  be  taken  (Fig.  168). 

As  the  X-ray  does  not 
affect  the  eye,  the  shad- 
ows cannot  be  seen  by 
the  eye,  but  if  a  screen 
coated  with  calcium 
tungstate  is  placed  back 
of  the  hand  it  becomes 
luminous  where  the 
rays  strike  it  and  hence 
the  shadow  picture  of 
the  bones  may  be  seen. 
This  is  much  used  in 
examining  bone  diseases 
and  imbedded  bodies 
such  as  bullets.  The 
X-ray  is  much  used  in 
treatment  of  cancer  and 
similar  diseases.  It 
should  be  used  with 
great  care,  as  exposure  to 
the  X-ray  often  causes 
serious  burns  which  are  not  felt  at  the  time  but  develop 
later  and  cause  the  flesh  to  slough  away.  The  operator 
continually  exposed  to  the  rays  is  protected  by  lead 
shields  which  stop  the  X-rays. 

The  photographer  can  take  a  flash-light  of  moving  object, 
because  the  light  from  the  burning  powder  is  of  such  short 
duration  that  during  the  time  of  exposure  the  object 


FIG.  168. 
X-ray  picture  of  the  Hand  of  a  Child. 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY  193 

moved  only  an  inappreciable  distance.  Recently  a  scientist 
has  taken  a  series  of  pictures  of  the  splash  when  a  weight 
is  dropped  into  water.  It  was  soon  found  that  for  such  a 
rapid  event  as  this,  the  flash-light  was  too  slow  and  un- 
certain, hence  he  used  an  electric  spark.  We  think  of 
the  electric  spark  from  the  condenser  or  Ley  den  jar  as 
being  almost  instantaneous.  Investigation  shows  that 
discharge  or  spark  behaves  much  like  a  spring  carrying  a 
weight.  When  the  spring  is  stretched  and  released,  it 
goes  beyond  the  point  of  rest  and  vibrates  back  and  forth 
until  it  gradually  comes  to  rest.  The  spark  from  the  con- 
denser or  Ley  den  jar  does  the  same  thing  as  though  it 
were  a  stretched  spring.  Possibly  it  is  some  form  of  strain 
in  ether.  The  frequency  of  the  alternations  of  the  dis- 
charge depends  upon  several  conditions  but  is  often  about 
230  million  per  second.  The  conductor  leading  to  the 
spark  gap  has  a  current  reversing  230  million  times  per 
second.  It  is  a  well-known  fact  that  a  magnetic  needle 
near  a  wire  carrying  a  current  tends  to  turn  at  right  angles 
to  the  wire.  If  the  current  is  reversed  the  needle  swings  in 
the  opposite  direction.  If  this  alternation  takes  place 
230  million  times  per  second,  the  needle  would  not  have  time 
to  keep  up,  but  we  can  imagine  a  strain  or  impulse  in  the 
ether  sent  out  and  reversed  that  many  times  per  second. 
This  would  be  a  wave  motion  in  ether  and  would  travel 
out  through  space  much  as  light  waves  do.  These  waves 
were  discovered  by  Professor  Hertz  and  are  called  the 
Hertzen  rays.  They  always  accompany  an  electric  dis- 
charge, are  continually  passing  through  space  and  through 
your  body.  Some  one  may  be  telegraphing  a  message 
through  your  body  now,  and  you  never  know  it.  As  these 
waves  cannot  be  seen,  felt,  nor  heard,  they  were  long  undis- 
covered. These  senses  of  ours  are  very  dull.  We  know 
little  about  this  world  of  ours ;  we  suspect  a  few  things  and 
14 


194  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

now  and  then  some  one  finds  out  some  new  fact  about 
things  about  us.  The  eye  can  detect  a  few  ether  vibrations; 
the  others  have  existed  all  these  hundreds  of  years  and 
now  we  have  found  only  a  few  of  them.  Here  we  have  a 
poetry  of  motion  surpassing  any  poetry  ever  written  by 
man,  a  machine  so  wonderful  in  its  fine  mechanism  that 
although  the  wisest  men  since  the  time  of  Adam  have 
been  studying  it,  we  have  to  admit  to-day  that  there  are 
many  of  the  parts  we  do  not  know  how  to  use  and  that  we 
know  only  a  little  about  our  surroundings.  The  true 
scientists  can  only  wonder  at  the  marvelous  intelligence  of 
a  being  capable  of  making  the  working  drawings  and 
constructing  such  a  mechanism  that  man  with  all  his 
boasted  powers  of  thought  can  understand  only  a  little 
of  it. 

To  lead  up  to  an  understanding  of  the  Hertzen  ray  we 
will  summarize  a  few  vibrations  with  which  we  are  already 
familiar. 

16  vibrations  per  second,  lowest  sound 

32  vibrations  per  second,  lowest  musical  tone 

128  vibrations  per  second,  man's  conversational  voice 

512  to  256  vibrations  per  second,  woman's  conver- 

.       , 
sational  voice 

2000  vibrations  per  second,  high  soprano 

4000  vibrations  per  second,  highest  musical  tone 

40,000  vibrations  per  second,  highest  audible  sound 

f  Trillions  vibrations  per  second,  X-ray 
Ether      '  2000    billion    vibrations    per    second,    photo- 
vibrations:  I       graphic  ray 

750  to  400  billion  vibrations  per  second 


MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY 


195 


Violet 
Indigo 
Blue 
Eye :    Green 
'  Yellow 
Orange 
Red  (about  33,000  to  make  one  inch) 

230  million  vibrations  per  second  Hertzen  ray  used  in 
wireless.     (The   frequency  often  becomes  much  less  than 


Spark  Coil 


FIG.  169. 

Simple  form  of  Marconi  apparatus  for  wireless  telegraphy.  The 
coherer  is  not  very  sensitive  and  is  now  replaced  by  a  detector.  Ether 
at  the  sending  station  is  vibrated  by  a  spark.  These  waves  travel 
out  as  light  waves  do  and  set  up  electric  vibration  in  the  receiving 
circuit. 

this  as  the  waves  vary  from  a  few  feet  to  over  a  mile  in 
length.) 

There  are  many  forms  of  apparatus  and  many  helpful 
devices  such  as  tuning  coils,  condensers,  electrolytic  inter- 


196  APPLIED  PHYSICS 

rupters,  electrolytic  detectors,  etc.  But  the  essential 
features  of  the  Marconi  system  are  shown  in  Fig.  169. 
At  the  sending  station  an  induction  coil  or  transformer  is 
used  to  produce  the  high  tension  to  cause  a  spark. 

The  discharge  of  the  spark  causes  an  oscillating  current 
in  the  aerial  with  a  frequency  of  some  230  million  oscilla- 
tions per  second.  The  frequency  may  be  varied  by  the 
size  of  the  coil  or  transformer  and  capacity  of  the  con- 
denser. This  pulsating  charge  in  the  wire  will  send  out 
vibrations  of  ether  which  travel  out  in  all  directions..  At 
the  receiving  station  a  coherer  is  so  connected  that  the 
vibrations  received  by  the  aerial  pass  through  it  to  the 
earth.  A  variable  capacity  or  else  a  tuning  coil  must  be 
used  to  make  the  receiving  station  of  the  same  frequency 
as  the  sending  station,  so  that  sympathetic  vibrations  will 
be  set  up.  For  detailed  description  of  all  parts  of  the 
apparatus  the  reader  is  referred  to  Popular  Electricity 
for  1910. 


INDEX 


Aeroplane,  25 

A.  C.  Current,  133 

A.  C.  Motor,  183,  184 

Acceleration,  28 

Acceleration  formulas,  30 

Air  pressure,  46 

Air  pump,  54 

Alternator,  175 

Ammeter,  145 

Ammonium  chloride  cell,  154 

Ampere,  153 

Amplitude,  39 

Archimedes'  principle,  57 

Arc  light,  171,  172 

Armature,  135 

Barometer,  46 

Batteries,  series  or  shunt,  161,  162 

Boiling  point,  109 

Boyle's  law,  53 

Brake  horse-power,  111 

Buoyancy,  57 


Calorimetry,  100 
Candle-power,  85 
Capillarity,  56 
Cathode  ray,  191 
Center  of  gravity,  33 
Centrifugal  force,  34 
Characteristic  of  dynamo,  147 
Charles'  law,  106 
Chemical  relation  of   electric 

rent,  150,  151 

Coefficient  of  expansion,  104 
Coefficient  of  friction,  37 
Color,  88 
Commutator,  133 


Compound  dynamo,  149 
Condenser,  188,  190 
Conduction  of  heat,  122 
Controller,  181 
Convection  currents,  123 
Convex  lens,  89 
Critical  angle,  88 
Crook's  tube,  191 
Crushing  strength,  65 
Current  of  electricity,  131,  133 
Curvilinear  motion,  34 
Cycle,  175 

Daniel  cell,  156 

D.  C.  Current,  133 

Delta  connection,  177 

Density,  58 

Differential  pulley,  19,  20 

Diffusion,  52 

Door  bell,  142 

Dry  cell,  155 

Dyne,  31 


Echo,  71 

Edison  storage  cell,  158 
Efficiency,  6 
Elasticity,  62 
Electric  bell,  143 
Electric  discharge,  192 
Electrolytic  cell,  151 
Electro-magnetic  relation,  136 
cur-    Electro-magnets,  137 
Electro-plating,  152 
Electroscope,  190 
Equilibrium,  33 
Ether  vibrations,  79 
Eye,  91 
197 


198 


INDEX 


Falling  bodies  formulas,  30 

Field  magnets,  134 

Flaming  arc,  173 

Fluid,  40 

Fluid  pressure,  43 

Foot-pound,  3 

Force,  21 

Frequency,  70 

Galvanometer,  143 
Gas,  40 

Gas-engine,  117 
Gas  pressure,  51 
Geissler  tube,  191 
Gravity,  32 
Gravity  cell,  156 

Hertzen  ray,  193 
Hot-air  engine,  121 
Hydraulic  press,  42 
Hydrometer,  60 
Hydrostatic  paradox,  44 

Inclined  plane,  13 
Inclosed  arc,  173 
Index  of  refraction,  87 
Indicator,  112 
Indicator  card,  113 
Indicated  horse-power,  113 
Induction  coil,  166,  168 
Induction  motor,  185 
Inertia,  22 

Intensity  of  illumination,  83 
Interference,  73 

Joule,  122 

Kinetic  energy,  35 
Kinetic  theory  of  heat,  98 

Latent  heat,  101,  102 

Laws  of  motion,  22 

Laws  of  vibrating  strings,  76 

Lever,  6 

Ley  den  jar,  189 


Lifting  magnets,  141 
Light,  79 
Liquid,  40 
Loudness  of  sound,  74 

Magnetic  attraction  and  repulsion, 

126 

Magnetic  field,  127 
Measurement  of  force,  31 
Mechanical  equivalent,  122 
Micrometer,  14 
Microscope,  93 
Momentum,  31 
Motion,  21 
Motor,  146,  179 
Motor  A.  C.,  184 

Ohm,  153 

Ohm's  law,  160 

Open  circuit  batteries,  154 

Opera  glass,  94 

Optical  disk,  95-97 

Optical  instruments,  92 

Osmosis,  52 

Parallelogram  of  forces,  23 
Pascal's  law,  42 
Pendulum,  38 
Phase,  175 
Phonograph,  76 
Photometry,  85 
Pitch  of  sound,  75 
Polarization,  154 
Poles  of  magnet,  126 
Post-office  box,  165 
Potential,  132 
Potential  energy,  35 
Power  transmission,  9 
Pressure,  41 
Pressure  gauge,  53 
Principle  of  machines,  5 
Projection  lantern,  92 
Prony  brake,  17 
Pulley,  7 
Pulley  cone,  15 


INDEX 


199 


Pump,  49 

Quality  of  sound,  75 

Radiation  of  heat,  122 
Recording  wattmeter,  181,  182 
Reflection  of  light,  83 
Refraction  of  light,  86 
Resistance  box,  164 
Resonance,  72 

Safety  factor,  62 

Saturated  steam,  109 

Screw,  14 

Series  dynamo,  147 

Series  motor,  181 

Shadow,  81 

Shearing  strength,  64 

Shunt  circuit,  160 

Shunt  dynamo,  149 

Simple  dynamo,  132 

Simple  machines,  4 

Siphon,  50 

Slide  valve  engine,  110 

Solid,  40 

Specific  gravity,  58 

Specific  heat,  103 

Star  connection,  177 

Starting  box,  180,  181 

Static  electricity,  187,  188 

Steam  engine,  110 

Storage  cell,  157,  158 

Strain,  63 

Stress,  62 

Superheated  steam,  109 

Surface  tension,  55 

Switch  board,  145 

Symbols,  148 


Telegraph,  142 
Telephone,  186 
Telescope,  94 
Temperature,  99 
Tensile  strength,  63 
Theory  of  magnetism,  129 
Thermometers,  99 
Three-phase  A.  C.,  186 
Torricellian  tube,  46 
Transformer,  169 
Transmission  of  A.  C.,  133 
Transmission  of  fluid  pressure,  42 
Transverse  strength,  66 
Turbine  steam,  115 

Units  of  force,  31 

Velocity,  22 
Velocity  of  light,  79 
Velocity  of  sound,  70 
Volt,  153 
Voltmeter,  145 
Voltmeter-ammeter  method  of 

measuring  resistance,  160 
Wattmeter,  146,  182 
Wave  length,  71 
Wave  motion,  69 
Weather  map,  48 
Weston  differential  pulley,  20 
Wheatstone's  bridge,  163 
Wheel  and  axle,  7 
Wireless  telegraphy,  195 
Work,  3 

X-ray,  191,  192 


YC   11428 


578546 


/  2. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY